faculty of mechanical engineering ... - … faculty of mechanical engineering ... b.tech...

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF

SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY (Established under Section 3 of UGC Act, 1956)

(A Christian Minority Institution) Jeppiaar Nagar, Rajiv Gandhi Salai,

Chennai – 600 119

SYLLABUS

FACULTY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

MASTER OF ENGINEERING PROGRAMME IN

COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN

MANUFACTURING ENGINEERING

THERMAL ENGINEERING

ENGINEERING DESIGN

MATERIAL SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING

(4 SEMESTERS)

REGULATIONS 2015

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

M.E. / M. Tech REGULAR 2 REGULATIONS 2015

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY

REGULATIONS – 2015

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM

Effective from the academic year 201 5-2016 and applicable to the students admitted to the Degree of M.E / M.Tech / M.Sc. / MBA. (Four Semesters)

1. NOMENCLATURE

Refers to the Master of Engineering / Technology Stream that a student has chosen for study. Eg. M.E in Applied Electronics.

Refers to the courses (Subjects) that a student would have to undergo during the study in the institution.

Refers to the Starting and Completion year of a Programme of study. Eg. Batch of 2015 -2017 refers to students belonging to a 2 year Degree programme admitted in 2015 and completing in 2017.

Each Programme and Department of the institution is grouped under various Faculty. Eg. Faculty of Computing consists of Departments of Computer Science, Information Technology and Computer Applications. This Faculty offers various Undergraduate and Postgraduate Programmes in Engineering like B.E (Computer Science), B.Tech (Information Technology),M.E (Computer Science), M.Tech (Information Technology)

Refers to the Head of a Group of Departments under which various UG and PG Programmes are offered.

Refers to the Head of a Department (HoD) offering various UG and PG programmes He / She will be the Head of all staff members and Students belonging to the Department

2. STRUCTURE OF PROGRAMME

2.1 Every Programme will have a curriculum with syllabi consisting of theory and practicals such as:

(i) Foundation courses comprising courses like Mathematics and Engineering Sciences.

(ii) Core courses belonging to the Major Programme of study.

(iii) Electives offered by the Faculty and the Department related to the Major programme of study.

(iv) Laboratory courses.

(v) Professional Training Courses during the semester vacation.

(vi) Project Work

2.2 Each semester curriculum shall normally have a blend of lecture course not exceeding 3 and practical course not exceeding 1.

2.3 Each course is normally assigned certain number of credits as follows:

Lecture Hours (Theory) : 1 credit per lecture hour per week, 1 credit per tutorial hour per week.

Laboratory Hours : 1 credit for 2 Practical hours, 2 credits for 3 or 4 hours of practicals per week.

Programme :

Course :

Batch :

Faculty :

Faculty Head :

HoD :



Project Work : 1 credit for 2 hours of project work per week

Professional Training : 5 credits for Minimum of 3 weeks of Training with at least 15 working

days of Training during semester vacations.

2.4 The medium of instruction, examinations and project report will be in English Language throughout the Programme

2.5 For the award of the degree, a student has to earn the total number of credits as specified in the curriculum of the relevant branch of study.

3. DURATION OF THE PROGRAMME

A student is normally expected to complete the M.E / M.Tech. Programme in 4 semesters but in any case not more than 8 consecutive semesters from the time of commencement of the course. The Head of the Department shall ensure that every teacher imparts instruction as per the number of hours specified in the syllabus and that the teacher teaches the full content of the specified syllabus for the course being taught.

4. REQUIREMENTS FOR COMPLETION OF A SEMESTER

A candidate who has fulfilled the following conditions shall be deemed to have satisfied the requirement for completion of a semester.

4.1 He / She secures not less than 90% of overall attendance in that semester.

4.2 Candidates who do not have the requisite attendance for the semester will not be permitted to write the semester Examinations.

5. FACULTY HEAD

Each Faculty is headed by a Faculty Head which comprises of many Departments and Courses offered by them. The Faculty Head is responsible for all activities taking place inside the Faculty in coordination with all Department Heads and all staff members belonging to the faculty. The Faculty Head will be appointed by the institution on rotational basis. The Faculty Head shall act as a linkage between the HoD’s, faculty members and the students. The Faculty Head makes a review of all the academic activities of Staff, Students and Research on a regular time interval and takes steps to improve the morale of all staff and students.

6. HEAD OF THE DEPARTMENT

Each Department offering various UG and PG programmes is headed by a Head (HoD). The HoD is responsible for allotting courses to each staff member uniformly in consultation with other HoD’s and Faculty Heads. The HoD is responsible for streamlined teaching of courses to students, improvement and Assessment of Teaching Quality within the Department on a continuous basis, Assessment of staff members, transparent conduct of Continuous Assessment Examinations, Interacting with Parents, ensuring that all academic and non academic activities of staff and students are monitored and steps taken for their improvement.

7. BATCH COORDINATOR

The Head of the Department shall appoint a Batch coordinator for each batch of students admitted in to a programme, throughout their period of study. The Batch coordinator shall act as a linkage between the HoD, faculty members and the students. The Batch coordinator gets information about the Syllabus coverage by the staff members, problems faced by the students academically and otherwise, attendance and progress of the students from the respective Class Counselors. The Batch Coordinator also informs the students of the academic schedule including the dates of assessments and syllabus coverage for each assessment,



weightage for each assessment, their Continuous assessment Marks and attendance Percentage details before the commencement of End Semester examinations.

8. CLASS COUNSELOR

There shall be a class counselor for each class. The class counselor will be one among the teachers of the Department. He / She will be appointed by the HoD of the department concerned. The responsibilities for the class Counselor shall be:

To act as the channel of communication between the HoD, Faculty Head, Batch Coordinator, Course Coordinator, staff and students of the respective class.

To collect and maintain various statistical details of students.

To help the Batch Coordinator in planning and conduct of the Classes.

To monitor the academic performance of the students including attendance and to inform the Batch Coordinator.

To take care of the students’ welfare activities like industrial visits, Seminars, awards etc.

9. COURSE COORDINATOR FOR EACH COURSE

Each theory course offered to more than one class or branch or group of branches, shall have a “Course coordinator” comprising all the teachers teaching the course, with one of the senior staff amongst them normally nominated as course coordinator, by the faculty head in consultation with the respective HoD’s.

The “Course Coordinator” shall meet the teachers handling the course, as often as possible and ensure a Common Teaching Methodology is followed for the course, Study materials are prepared by the staff members and communicated to the students periodically, involving students in course based projects and assignments, common question paper for continuous assessment tests, uniform evaluation of continuous assessments Answer sheets by arriving at a common scheme of evaluation.

• The Course coordinator is responsible for evaluating the Performance of the students in the Continuous Assessments and End Semester exams and analyse them to find suitable methodologies for improvement in the performance. This analysis should be submitted to the HoD and Faculty Head for suitable action.

10. EXAMINATIONS

The end semester examinations shall normally be conducted between October and December during the odd semesters and between March and May in the even semesters. The maximum marks for each theory and practical course (including the project work and Viva Voce examination in the final Semester) shall be 100 with the following breakup.

(i) Theory Courses

Continuous Assessment

End Semester Exam

(ii) For Practical courses

Continuous Assessment

End Semester Exams

: 50 Marks : 50 Marks

: 50 Marks : 50 Marks



11. CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT EXAMS

a. Theory courses There will be a Minimum of two Continuous Assessment Exams, for each Theory course. Each Assessment Exam will be conducted for a Maximum of 50 Marks. The total marks secured in the Two Assessment Exams out of 100, will be converted to 45 Marks. The % of attendance secured by the candidate in a course in a semester will carry a weightage of 5 Marks, which will be added to the Continuous Assessment Marks for each course.

The Continuous assessment marks obtained by the candidate in the first appearance shall be retained and considered valid for all subsequent attempts, till the candidate secures a pass.

b. Practical courses

For Practical Courses, the student will be evaluated on a continuous basis for 25 Marks (which will include performing all experiments, submitting Observation and Record Note Book in scheduled Format and Time), 20 Marks for Model Exam at the end of the semester and 5 Marks for Attendance in the course.

For Practical courses, if a student has been absent for some Practical Classes or has performed poorly, then the student will have to get permission from the Lab incharge and batch coordinator to do the experiments, so that he/she meets all the requirements for the course and thereby allowed to appear for Model and End Semester Exams.

If a student has not done all the experiments assigned for that Lab, before the scheduled date or has attendance percentage less than 90%, the student will not be allowed to appear for the Model and end semester Practical Exam. Such students will have to redo the course again by doing all the experiments in the next semester when the course is offered.

12. ELECTIVE COURSES

Every student has the option of choosing Six elective courses during the period of study. The student also has the choice of selecting the electives, from electives offered by Departments within the faculty in that semester or from electives offered by other faculty.

13. FINAL YEAR PROJECT WORK

Project work is to be undergone by each student in the final year. The Project work has been divided in to two Phases (Phase 1 and 2). Project work will have to be decided by the end of Second Semester. Project work is to be done by individual student. Phase 1 is to be done in the Pre-final Semester and Phase 2 during the Final Semester.

For Project work, Assessment is done on a continuous basis by 3 Reviews for 50 Marks and Final Viva voce carries 50 Marks.

There shall be three Project Reviews (Conducted during the Pre-final semester and Final Semester) to be conducted by a review committee. The student shall make presentation on the progress made, before the committee. The Head of the Department shall constitute the review committee for each branch in consultation with Faculty Head. The members of the review committee will evaluate the progress of the Project and award marks.

PROJECT REVIEWS FINAL PROJECT

VIVA VOCE 1 2 3

Max. Marks 5 15 30 50



The total marks obtained in the three reviews, rounded to the nearest integer is the Continuous Assessment marks out of 50. There shall be a viva-voce examination for final Semester Examination conducted by one internal examiner, one external examiner and the supervisor concerned.

A student is expected to attend all the Project Reviews conducted by the institution on the scheduled dates. It is mandatory for every student to attend the Reviews, even if they are working on a project in an industry based outside Chennai city. It is their duty to inform the organization about the project reviews and its importance, and get permission to attend the same. If a student does not attend any of the Project Reviews, he / she shall not be allowed for the successive reviews and thereby not allowed to appear for the Final viva voce.

The student is expected to submit his findings from the Project work in the form of a Research paper, to be published in a International Journal which is Scopus Indexed. This is a minimum requirement for a PG student to appear for final Viva voce Examination.

The final Project viva-voce examination shall carry 50 Marks. Marks are awarded to each student of the project group based on the individual performance in the viva-voce examination. The external examiner shall be appointed by the Controller of Examinations. The Internal and External Examiner will evaluate the Project for 20 Marks each. The project report shall carry a maximum of 10 marks.

The candidate is expected to submit the project report as per the guidelines of the institution on or before the last day of submission. If a candidate fails to submit the project report on or before the specified deadline, he / she can be granted an extension of time up to a maximum limit of 5 days for the submission of project work, by the Head of the Department.

If he / she fails to submit the project report, even beyond the extended time, then he / she is deemed to have failed in the Project Work and shall register for the same in the subsequent semester and re-do the project after obtaining permission from the HoD and Faculty Head.

14. PASSING REQUIRMENTS

A candidate should secure not less than 50% of total marks prescribed for the courses, subject to securing a minimum of 30% marks out of Max. Mark in End Semester Exams. Then he / she shall be declared to have passed in the Examination.

If a candidate fails to secure a pass in a particular course, it is mandatory that he / she shall register and reappear for the examination in that course during the next semester when examination is conducted in that course. It is mandatory that he / she should continue to register and reappear for the examination till he / she secures a pass.

15. AWARD OF GRADES

All assessments of a course will be done on absolute marks basis. However, for the purpose of reporting the performance of a candidate, letter grades, each carrying certain number of points, will be awarded as per the range of total marks (out of 100) obtained by the candidate in each course as detailed below:



RANGE OF MARKS FOR GRADES

Range of Marks Grade Grade Points (GP)

90-100 A++ 10

80-89 A+ 9

70-79 B++ 8

60-69 B+ 7

50-59 C 6

00-49 (Reappear) RA 0

ABSENT AAA 0

Withdrawal W 0

Authorised Break of Study ABS 0

CUMULATIVE GRADE POINT AVERAGE CAL CULATION calculation on a 10 Point scale is used to describe the overall performance of a student in all courses from first

semester to the last semester. RA, AAA and W grades will be excluded for calculating GPA and CGPA. ΣiCiGPi CGPA = ΣiCi

where Ci – Credits for the course GPi – Grade Point for the course

Σi – Sum of all courses successfully cleared during all the semesters

Final Degree is awarded based on the following:

CGPA ≥ 9.0 – First Class - Exemplary CGPA ≥ 7.50 < 9.00 – First Class with Distinction CGPA ≥ 6.00 < 7.50 – First Class

CGPA ≥ 5.00 < 6.00 – Second Class

Minimum requirements for award of Degree, a student should have obtained a minimum of 5.0 CGPA.

16. GRADE SHEET

After revaluation results are declared, Grade Sheets will be issued to each student which will contain the following details

Name of the Candidate with Date of Birth and Photograph.

The programme and degree in which the candidate has studied

The list of courses enrolled during the semester and the grade Scured

The Grade Point Average (GPA) for the semester.

17. ELIGIBILITY FOR THE AWARD OF DEGREE

A student shall be declared to be eligible for the award of the M.E / M.Tech. / M.Sc degree, provided the student has successfully completed all the requirements of the programme, and has passed all the prescribed examinations in all the 4 semesters within the maximum period specified in clause 3.



i) Successfully gained the required number of total credits as specified in the curriculum corresponding to his/her programme within the stipulated time.

ii) Successfully completed the programme requirements and has passed all the courses prescribed in all the semesters within a maximum period of 4 years reckoned from the commencement of the first semester to which the candidate was admitted.

iii) Successfully completed any additional courses prescribed by the institution.

iv) No disciplinary action pending against the student.

v) The award of Degree must have been approved by the Board of Management of the institution.

18. CLASSIFICATION OF THE DEGREE AWARDED

1. A candidate who qualifies for the award of the Degree having passed the examination in all the courses of all the 4 semesters in his/her first appearance within a maximum of 4 consecutive semesters, securing a overall CGPA of not less than 9.0 (Calculated from 1st semester) shall be declared to have passed the examination in First Class - EXEMPLARY. Authorized Break of Study vide clause 20, will be considered as an Appearance for Examinations, for award of First Class – Exemplary. Withdrawal from a course shall not be considered as an appearance for deciding the eligibility of a candidate for First Class – Exemplary

2. A candidate who qualifies for the award of the Degree having passed the examination in all the courses of all the 4 semesters in his/her first appearance within a maximum of 4 consecutive semesters, securing a overall CGPA of not less than 7.5 (Calculated from 1st semester) shall be declared to have passed the examination in First Class with Distinction. Authorized Break of Study vide Clause 20, will be considered as an Appearance for Examinations, for award of First Class with Distinction. Withdrawal shall not be considered as an appearance for deciding the eligibility of a candidate for First Class with Distinction.

3. A candidate who qualifies for the award of the Degree having passed the examination in all the courses of all the 4 semesters within a maximum period of 4 consecutive semesters after his/her commencement of study securing a overall CGPA of not less than 6.0 (Calculated from 1st semester), shall be declared to have passed the examination in First Class. Authorized break of study vide Clause 20(if availed of) or prevention from writing End semester examination due to lack of attendance will not be considered as Appearance in Examinations. For award of First class, the extra number of semesters than can be provided (in addition to four years for Normal M.E/M.Tech./M.Sc will be equal to the Number of semesters availed for Authorized Break of Study or Lack of Attendance. Withdrawal shall not be considered as an appearance for deciding the eligibility of a candidate for First Class.

4. All other candidates who qualify for the award of the Degree having passed the examination in all the courses of all the 4 semesters within a maximum period of 8 consecutive semesters, after his/her commencement of study securing a overall CGPA of not less than 5.0, (Calculated from 1st semester) shall be declared to have passed the examination in Second Class.

5. A candidate who is absent in semester examination in a course/project work after having registered for the same, shall be considered to have appeared in that examination for the purpose of classification.

6. A candidate can apply for revaluation of his/her semester examination answer paper in a theory course, immediately after the declaration of results, on payment of a prescribed fee along with prescribed application to the Controller of Examinations through the Head of Department. The Controller of Examination will arrange for the revaluation and the result will be intimated to the candidate concerned through the Head of the Department. Revaluation is not permitted for practical courses and for project work.



19. WITHDRAWAL FROM EXAMINATIONS

A candidate may, for valid reasons, (medically unfit / unexpected family situations) be granted permission to withdraw from appearing for the examination in any course or courses in any one of the semester examination during the entire duration of the degree programme.

Withdrawal application shall be valid only if the candidate is otherwise normally eligible (if he/she satisfies Attendance requirements and should not be involved in Disciplinary issues or Malpractice in Exams) to write the examination and if it is made within FIVE days before the commencement of the examination in that course or courses and also recommended by the Faculty Head through HoD.

Not withstanding the requirement of mandatory FIVE days notice, applications for withdrawal for special cases under extraordinary conditions will be considered based on the merit of the case.

Withdrawal shall not be considered as an appearance for deciding the eligibility of a candidate for First Class – Exemplary, First Class with Distinction and First Class.

Withdrawal is NOT permitted for arrears examinations of the previous semesters.

20. AUTHORISED BREAK OF STUDY

This shall be granted by the institution management, only once during the full duration of study, for valid reasons for a maximum of one year during the entire period of study of the degree programme.

A candidate is normally not permitted to temporarily break the period of study. However, if a candidate would like to discontinue the programme temporarily in the middle of duration of study for valid reasons (such as accident or hospitalization due to prolonged ill health), he / she shall apply through the Faculty Head in advance (Not later than the Reopening day of that semester) through the Head of the Department stating the reasons. He /She should also mention clearly, the Joining date and Semester for Continuation of Studies after completion of break of Study. In such cases, he/she will attend classes along with the Junior Batches. A student who availed break of study has to rejoin only in the same semester from where he/she left.

The authorized break of study will not be counted towards the duration specified for passing all the courses for the purpose of classification only for First Class.

The total period for completion of the programme shall not exceed more than 8 consecutive semesters from the time of commencement of the course irrespective of the period of break of study in order that he / she may be eligible for the award of the degree

If any student is not allowed to appear for Examinations for not satisfying Academic requirements and Disciplinary reasons, (Except due to Lack of Attendance), the period spent in that semester shall NOT be considered as permitted ‘Break of Study’ and is NOT applicable for Authorised Break of Study.

In extraordinary situations, a candidate may apply for additional break of study not exceeding another one Semester by paying prescribed fee for break of study. Such extended break of study shall be counted for the purpose of classification of First Class Degree.

If the candidate has not reported back to the department, even after the extended Break of Study, the name of the candidate shall be deleted permanently from the institution enrollment. Such candidates are not entitled to seek readmission under any circumstances.



21. PROFESSIONAL TRAINING

Every student is required to undergo Industrial Visits during every semester of the Programme. Heads of Departments shall take efforts to send the students to industrial visits in every semester.

The students will have to undergo Professional training for a Minimum period of 3 weeks during the semester Holidays.

This could be internship in a industry approved by the Faculty Head or Professional Enrichment courses (like attending Summer Schools, Winter Schools, Workshops) offered on Campus or in Registered Off Campus recognised Training Centres approved by the Faculty Head for a minimum period of 3 weeks.

A report on Training undergone by the student, duly attested by the Coordinator concerned from the industry / Organisation, in which the student has undergone training and the Head of the Department concerned, shall be submitted after the completion of training. The evaluation of report and viva voce examination can be computed as per norms for the Semester examination.

The evaluation of training will be made by a three member committee constituted by Head of the Department in consultation with Batch Coordinator and respective Training Coordinator. A presentation should be made by the student before the Committee, based on the Industrial Training or Professional Enrichment undergone.

22. NON CREDIT COURSES

Every student has the opportunity to enroll in any of the following Non Credit Courses, during the programme. The student will have to register for the courses with the respective coordinator before the end of First Semester.

National Cadet Corps (NCC)

National Service Scheme (NSS)

Youth Red Cross (YRC)

SPORTS CONTRIBUTION: The student is involved in any sport and represents the institution in Tournaments.

PROFESSIONAL CLUBS: Any student can also involve in any of the Professional Clubs available in the institution and contribute towards that.

The above contribution should be completed by the end of Third Semester as per the requirements. The Contribution and the Performance of the candidate, will be Printed in the Final Semester Grade sheet and Consolidate Grade Sheet under the Category “NON CREDIT COURSES” indicated as SATISFACTORY or NOT SATISFACTORY.

23. OPPORTUNITY TO GAIN EXPOSURE OUTSIDE THE INSTITUTION

This is facilitated by the “Centre for Academic Partnerships” of Sathyabama institute of science and technology consisting of a team of experienced faculty members involved in forging Partnerships with Leading Universities, Educational Institutions, Industrial and Research establishments in India and Abroad.

A student can be selected, to get Professional Exposure in his/her area of Expertise in any Reputed Research Organization or Educational Institution of repute or any Universities in India and abroad.

This is possible only with the List of Research Organizations, Educational Institutions in India and abroad approved by Sathyabama institute of science and technology.

A student should have got a minimum of 6 CGPA without any arrears at the time of applying and at the time of undergoing such courses outside, to avail this facility.



The student can have the option of spending not more than three to Six months in the Final year of his/her Degree. During this period, the student can do his/her Project work or register for courses which will be approved by the Centre for Academic Partnerships (CAP), under the Guidance of a Project Supervisor who is employed in the Organization and Co-guided by a staff member from our institution.

Applications for the above should be submitted by the students to the Centre for Academic Partnerships (CAP), in the required format, with complete details of institution, Courses and Equivalence Details and approved by the Faculty Head.

The Centre will go through the applications and select the students based on their Academic Performance and enthusiasm to undergo such courses. This will be communicated to the Universities concerned by the Centre.

The performance of the student in the courses, registered in that Institute or University will be communicated officially to Centre for Academic Partnerships (CAP).

The students who undergo training outside the institution (either in India or Abroad) is expected to abide by all Rules and Regulations to be followed as per Indian and the respective Country Laws, and also should take care of Financial, Travel and Accommodation expenses.

24. DISCIPLINE

Every student is required to observe disciplined and decorous behaviour during the program of study including examinations otherwise he/she shall be liable for punitive action as prescribed by the institution from time to time.

25. REVISION OF REGULATIONS AND CURRICULUM

The institution may from time to time revise, amend or change the regulations, scheme of examinations and syllabi if found necessary.



PROGRAMME : M.E


M.E. – COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN

CURRICULUM

S E M E S T E R – 1

Sl. No. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C PAGE No.

THEORY

1 SMT5104 Advanced Mathematics 3

1 0

4 1

2 SPR5101 Advanced Optimization Techniques 4 0 0 4 2

3 SPR5102 Mechanical Behaviour of Engineering Materials 4 0 0 4 3

4 SPR5103 Design for Manufacture and Assembly 4 0 0 4 4

5 SPR5104 Product Design and PLM 4 0 0 4 5

6 SPR5105 Advanced Strength of Materials 4 0 0 4 6

PRACTICAL

SPR6531 CAD Lab – I 0 0 6 3 43 7

Total Credi ts

27

Sl. No. COURSE CODE


COURSE TITLE L T P C PAGE No.

THEORY

SPR5106 Advanced Vibration Engineering

4 0 0 4 7 1

2 SPR5107 Applications of Robust Design 4 0 0 4 8

3 Elective - 1 4 0 0 4

4 Elective - 2 4 0 0 4

5 Elective - 3 4 0 0 4

PRACTICAL

SPR6532 CAD Lab – II 0 0 6 3 44 6

7 S32 PT Professional Training 5

Total Credits 28

L - LECTURE HOURS, T – TUTORIAL HOURS, P – PRACTICAL HOURS, C – CREDITS



SEMESTER – 3


THEORY

1 SPR5201 Applied Finite Element Methods

4 0 0 4 15

2 Elective - 4 4 0 0 4

3 Elective - 5 4 0 0 4

4 Elective - 6 4 0 0 4

PRACTICAL

SPR6533 CAD Lab – III 0 0 6 3 44 5

6 Project Work (Phase – 1)

Total Credits 19

1 S32PROJ

SEMESTER – 4

Project Work (Phase – 1 & 2)

20

0 0 40

Total Credits 20

Sl. No. COURSE CODE

TOTAL CREDITS FOR THE PROGRAMME: 94

P C PAGE No.

LIST OF ELECTIVES

COURSE TITLE L T

1 SPR5601 Integrated Manufacturing Systems 4 0 0 4 52

2 SPR5602 Industrial Robotics and Programming 4 0 0 4 53

3 SPR5603 Rapid Prototyping 4 0 0 4 54

4 SPR5604 Computational Fluid Dynamics

4 0 0 4 55

5 SPR5605 Applications of Artificial Intelligence in Mechanical Engineering 4 0 0 4 56

6 SPR5606 Manufacturing Information Systems 4 0 0 4 57

7 SPR5607 Mechatronics in Manufacturing systems 4 0 0 4 58

8 SPR5608 Advanced Machine Tool Design 4 0 0 4 59

9 SPR5609 Reverse Engineering 4 0 0 4 60

10 SPR5610 Advanced Composite Materials and Mechanics 4 0 0 4 61

11 SPR5611 Concurrent Engineering 4 0 0 4 62

12 SPR5612 Smart Materials and Applications 4 0 0 4 63



P R O G R A M M E : M . E

M A N U F A C T U R I N G E N G I N E E R I N G

C U R R I C U L U M

SEMESTER – 1


THEORY

1 SMT5104 Advanced Mathematics

3 1 0 4 1

2 SPR5108 Advanced Material Technology 4 0 0 4 9

3 SPR5109 Advanced Tool Engineering 4 0 0 4 10

4 SPR51 10 Mechanics of Metal Forming 4 0 0 4 11

5 SPR51 11 Manufacturing, Metrology and Quality Control 4 0 0 4 12

6 SPR5112 Advanced Welding Technology

4 0 0 4 13

PRACTICAL

SPR6534 Non Destructive testing Lab 0 0 6 3 45 7

Total Credits 27

Sl. No. COURSE CODE

SEMESTER – 2

COURSE TITLE

C PAGE No. L T P

THEORY

SPR5103 Design for Manufacture and Assembly 4 0 0 4 4 1

2 SPR5113 Advanced Manufacturing Process 4 0 0 4 14

3 Elective - 1 4 0 0 4

4 Elective - 2 4 0 0 4

5 Elective - 3 4 0 0 4

PRACTICAL

SPR6535 Manufacturing Process Lab

0 0 6 3 45 6

7 S92PT Professional Training 5

Total Credits 28





Sl. No. COURSE CODE

SEMESTER – 3


THEORY

1 SPR5202 Flexible Manufacturing System

4 0 0 4 16

2 Elective - 4 4 0 0 4

3 Elective - 5 4 0 0 4

4 Elective - 6 4 0 0 4

PRACTICAL

SPR6536 CIM Lab 0 0 6 3 46 5

6 Project Work(Phase - 1)

Total Credits 19

1 S92PROJ

SEMESTER – 4

Project Work (Phase – 1 & 2) 0 0 40 20

Total Credits 20

Sl. No. COURSE CODE


P C PAGE No.

LIST OF ELECTIVE SUBJECTS

COURSE TITLE L T

1 SPR5606 Manufacturing Information Systems 4 0 0 4 57

2 SPR5607 Mechatronics in Manufacturing Systems 4 0 0 4 58

3 SPR5613 Production Automation and CNC Technology

4 0 0 4 64

4 SPR5614 Robot Design and Programming 4 0 0 4 65

5 SPR5615 Quality Management 4 0 0 4 66

6 SPR5616 Theory of Metal Cutting 4 0 0 4 67

7 SPR5617 Industrial Ergonomics 4 0 0 4 68

8 SPR5618 Finite Element application in Manufacturing 4 0 0 4 69

9 SPR5619 Lean Manufacturing 4 0 0 4 70

10 SPR5620 Intelligent Product Design and Manufacturing 4 0 0 4 71

11 SPR5621 Mems and Nano Materials 4 0 0 4 72

12 SPR5622 Manufacturing System Simulation 4 0 0 4 73




T H E R M A L E N G I N E E R I N G

C U R R I C U L U M



THEORY

1 SMT5104 Advanced Mathematics 3 1 0 4 1

2 SME5101 Advanced Fluid Mechanics 4 0 0 4 17

3 SME5102 Advanced Thermodynamics 4 0 0 4 18

4 SME5103 Advanced Heat Transfer 4 0 0 4 19

5 SME5104 Fuels, Combustion and Emission Control 4 0 0 4 20

6 SME5105 Instrumentation in Thermal Engineering 4 0 0 4 21

PRACTICAL

SME6531 Thermal Engineering Lab 0 0 6 3 46 7

Total Credits 27

Sl. No. COURSE CODE


COURSE TITLE

C PAGE No. L T P

THEORY

SME5106 Optimum Utilization of Heat and Power 4 0 0 4 22 1

2 SPR5604 Computational Fluid Dynamics 4 0 0 4 55

3 Elective – 1 4 0 0 4

4 Elective – 2 4 0 0 4

5 Elective – 3 4 0 0 4

PRACTICAL

SME6532 Computational Fluid Dynamics Lab

0 0 6 3 47 6


Total Credits 28




SEMESTER – 3


THEORY

1 SME5201 Design and Optimization of Thermal System

4 0 0 4 33

2 Elective – 4 4 0 0 4

3 Elective – 5 4 0 0 4

4 Elective – 6 4 0 0 4

PRACTICAL

SME6533 Simulation Lab 0 0 6 3 47 5

6 Project Work (Phase - 1)

Total Credits 19

Sl. No. COURSE CODE

SEMESTER – 4

COURSE TITLE

C PAGE No. L T P

1 S39PROJ Project Work (Phase – 1 & 2) 0 0 40 20

Total Credits 20

Sl. No. COURSE CODE


P C PAGE No.


COURSE TITLE L T

1 SME5601 Advanced I.C. Engines 4 0 0 4 74

2 SME5602 Advanced Refrigeration and Air conditioning 4 0 0 4 75

3 SME5603 Aircraft and Space Propulsion 4 0 0 4 76

4 SME5604 Cryogenic Engineering 4 0 0 4 77

5 SME5605 Design and Analysis of Turbo Machines 4 0 0 4 78

6 SME5606 Design of Heat Exchangers 4 0 0 4 79

7 SME5607 Energy Management in Thermal Systems 4 0 0 4 80

8 SME5608 Experimental Methods in Thermal Power Engineering 4 0 0 4 81

9 SME5609 Fluidized Bed Systems 4 0 0 4 82

10 SME5610 Finite Element Methods in Thermal Engineering 4 0 0 4 83

11 SME5611 Thermal and Nuclear Power Plants 4 0 0 4 84




E N G I N E E R I N G D E S I G N

C U R R I C U L U M

SEMESTER – 1


THEORY

1 SMT51 04 Advanced Mathematics

3 1 0 4 1

2 SPR5101 Advanced Optimization Techniques 4 0 0 4 2


4 SME5108 Advanced Mechanisms and Simulation 4 0 0 4 24

5 SME5109 Computer Methods in Mechanical Design 4 0 0 4 25

6 SME51 10 Concepts of Engineering Design

4 0 0 4 26

PRACTICAL

SME6534 CAD Lab 0 0 6 3 48 7

Total Credits 27

Sl. No. COURSE CODE

SEMESTER – 2

COURSE TITLE

C PAGE No. L T P

THEORY

SPR5106 Advanced Vibration Engineering

4 0 0 4 7 1

2 SME5107 Advanced Mechanical Engineering Design 4 0 0 4 23

3 Elective - 1 4 0 0 4

4 Elective - 2 4 0 0 4

5 Elective - 3 4 0 0 4

PRACTICAL

SME6535 Simulation and Analysis Lab 0 0 6 3 49 6


Total Credits 28




Sl. No. COURSE CODE

SEMESTER – 3


THEORY

1 SPR5201 Applied Finite Element Methods

4 0 0 4 15

2 Elective - 4 4 0 0 4

3 Elective - 5 4 0 0 4

4 Elective - 6 4 0 0 4

PRACTICAL

SME6536 Computational Fluid Dynamics Lab

0 0 6 3 49 5


Total Credits 19

1 S39PROJ

SEMESTER – 4

Project Work (Phase – 1 & 2) 0 0 40 20

Total Credits 20

Sl. No. COURSE CODE


P C PAGE No.


COURSE TITLE L T

1 SPR51 05 Advanced Strength of Materials 4 0 0 4 6

2 SPR5107 Applications of Robust Design

4 0 0 4 8

3 SPR5601 Integrated Manufacturing Systems 4 0 0 4 52

4 SPR5603 Rapid Prototyping 4 0 0 4 54

5 SPR5604 Computational Fluid Dynamics 4 0 0 4 55

6 SPR5607 Mechatronics in Manufacturing Systems 4 0 0 4 58

7 SPR5608 Advanced Machine Tool Design 4 0 0 4 59

8 SPR5609 Reverse Engineering 4 0 0 4 60

9 SPR5610 Advanced Composite Materials and Mechanics 4 0 0 4 61

10 SME5612 Design of Material Handling Equipment 4 0 0 4 85

11 SME5613 Design of Hydraulic and Pneumatic Systems 4 0 0 4 86

12 SME5614 Fracture Mechanics 4 0 0 4 87

13 SME5615 Tribology in Design 4 0 0 4 88




M A T E R I A L S S C I E N C E A N D E N G I N E E R I N G

C U R R I C U L U M



THEORY

1 SMT5104 Advanced Mathematics 3 1 0 4 1


3 SME5111 Principles of Materials Engineering 4 0 0 4 27

4 SME5112 Metallurgical Processing 4 0 0 4 28

5 SME5113 Fundamentals of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology 4 0 0 4 29

6 SME5116 Thermodynamics of Materials

4 0 0 4 32

PRACTICAL

SME6537 Microstructural Characterization Lab 0 0 6 3 50 7

Total Credits 27

Sl. No. COURSE CODE


COURSE TITLE

C PAGE No. L T P

THEORY

SME5114 Polymers and Composites Materials

4 0 0 4 30 1

2 SME5115 Materials Characterization 4 0 0 4 31

3 Elective – 1 4 0 0 4

4 Elective – 2 4 0 0 4

5 Elective – 3 4 0 0 4

PRACTICAL

SME6538 Thin Film Deposition Lab

0 0 6 3 50 6


Total Credits 28





Sl. No. COURSE CODE

SEMESTER – 3


THEORY

1 SME5202 Surface Engineering

4 0 0 4 34

2 Elective – 4 4 0 0 4

3 Elective – 5 4 0 0 4

4 Elective – 6 4 0 0 4

PRACTICAL

SME6539 Powder Metallurgy and Metallography Lab

0 0 6 3 50 5

6 Project Work (Phase - 1)

Total Credits 19

Sl. No. COURSE CODE

SEMESTER – 4

COURSE TITLE

C PAGE No. L T P

1 S94PROJ Project Work (Phase – 1 & 2) 0 0 40 20

Total Credits 20

TOTAL CREDITS FOR THE PROGRAMME 94

Sl. No. COURSE CODE



1 SME5616 Physics of Materials 4 0 0 4 89

2 SME5617 Properties of Materials 4 0 0 4 90

3 SME5618 Corrosion Science 4 0 0 4 91

4 SME5619 Advanced Metallic Materials and Processes 4 0 0 4 92

5 SME5620 Materials for Energy 4 0 0

4 93

6 SME5621 Chemical Synthesis of Materials 4 0 0 4 94

7 SME5622 Mechanical and High Temperature Behaviour of Materials 4 0 0 4 95

8 SME5623 Technology of Semiconductors 4 0 0 4 96

9 SME5624 Ceramic Science and Technology 4 0 0

4 97

10 SME5625 Nanoscale Fabrication and Measurement Techniques 4 0 0 4 98

11 SME5626 Non-Destructive Testing 4 0 0 4 99

12 SME5627 Biomaterials 4 0 0 4 100

13 SME5628 Smart Materials 4 0 0 4 101

14 SME5629 Superconducting Materials and Applications 4 0 0 4 102

15 SME5630 Industrial Tribology 4 0 0 4 103




M . E . – A E R O N A U T I C A L E N G I N E E R I N G

C U R R I C U L U M

SEMESTER – 1


THEORY

1 SMT5104 Advanced Mathematics

3 1 0 4 1

2 SAE5101 Theory of Aerodynamics

4 0 0 4 35

3 SAE5102 Advanced Aircraft Structures 3 1 0 4 36

4 SAE5103 Aerospace Propulsion 3 1 0 4 37

5 SAE5104 Structural Dynamics 3 1 0 4 38

6 SAE51 05 Experimental Techniques for Aeronautical Applications 4 0 0 4 39

PRACTICAL

SAE6531 Advanced Aircraft Structures Lab 0 0 6 3 51 7

Total Credits 27

Sl. No. COURSE CODE

SEMESTER – 2


THEORY

SAE5106 Flight Mechanics 3 1 0 4 40 1

2 SAE51 07 Finite Element Methods for Aircraft Structures 3 1 0 4 41

3 Elective - 1 4 0 0 4

4 Elective - 2 4 0 0 4

5 Elective - 3 4 0 0 4

PRACTICAL

SAE6532 Advanced Aerodynamics Lab

0 0 6 3 51 6

7 S40 PT Professional Training

5

Total Credits 28




SEMESTER – 3


THEORY

1 SAE5201 Advanced Composite Structures

3 1 0 4 42

2 Elective - 4 4 0 0 4

3 Elective - 5 4 0 0 4

4 Elective - 6 4 0 0 4

PRACTICAL

SAE6533 Advanced Computational Fluid Dynamics Lab 0 0 6 3 51 5


Total Credits 19

1 S40PROJ

SEMESTER – 4

Project Work (Phase – 1 & 2)

20

0 0 40

Total Credits 20

Sl. No. COURSE CODE


P C PAGE No.

LIST OF ELECTIVES

COURSE TITLE L T

1 SAE5601 Missile Aerodynamics 4 0 0 4 104

2 SAE5602 Computational Aerodynamics 4 0 0 4 105

3 SAE5603 Theory of Turbulence 4 0 0 4 106

4 SAE5604 Elements of Hypersonic Flight 4 0 0 4 107

5 SAE5605 Boundary Layer Theory 4 0 0 4 108

6 SAE5606 Turbo Machinery Aerodynamics 4 0 0 4 109

7 SAE5607 Aerospace Materials 4 0 0 4 110

8 SAE5608 Helicopter Aerodynamics and Dynamics 4 0 0 4 111

9 SAE5609 Applied Aero Elasticity

4 0 0 4 112

10 SAE561 0 Design and Analysis of Composite Structures 4 0 0 4 113

11 SAE561 1 Experimental and Repair Techniques for Composites 4 0 0 4 114

12 SAE561 2 Theory of Plates and Shells 4 0 0 4 115

13 SAE561 3 High Temperature Problems in Structures 4 0 0 4 116

14 SAE561 4 Vibration of Structures 4 0 0 4 117

15 SAE561 5 Advanced Propulsion System 4 0 0 4 118




16 SAE561 6 Elements of Rocket Propulsion 4 0 0 4 119

17 SAE561 7 Rocket Combustion Processes 4 0 0 4 120

18 SAE561 8 Numerical Heat Transfer 4 0 0 4 121

19 SAE561 9 Armoured Fighting Vehicle and Weapon Systems 4 0 0 4 122

20 SAE5620 Ballistics of Bombs and Projectiles 4 0 0 4 123



SMT5104 ADVANCED MATHEMATICS L T P Credits Total Marks

3 1 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE The ability to identify, reflect upon, evaluate and apply different types of information and knowledge to form

independent judgements.

UNIT 1 MATRIX THEORY 11 Hrs. QR decomposition – Eigen values using shifted QR algorithm- Singular Value Decomposition - Pseudo inverse- Least square approximations.

UNIT 2 CALCULUS OF VARIATIONS 13 Hrs.

Concept of Functionals - Euler’s equation – functional dependent on first and higher order derivatives – Functionals on several dependent variables – Iso parametric problems - Variational problems with moving boundaries.

UNIT 3 TRANSFORM METHODS 12 Hrs.

Laplace transform methods for one dimensional wave equation – Displacements in a string – Longitudinal vibration of a elastic bar – Fourier transform methods for one dimensional heat conduction problems in infinite and semi infinite rod. Laplace equation – Properties of harmonic functions – Fourier transform methods for Laplace equations. Solution for Poisson equation by Fourier transforms method.

UNIT 4 ELLIPTIC EQUATIONS 11 Hrs. Laplace equation – Properties of harmonic functions – Fourier transform methods for Laplace equations – Solution for Poisson equation by Fourier transforms method.

UNIT 5 LINEAR AND NONLINEAR PROGRAMMING 13 Hrs. Taylor’s method – modified Euler’s method – Runge- kutta method of fourth order - Predictor Corrector methods– Milne’s method – Adams bash forth method.

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Richard Bronson, Schaum’s Outlines of Theory and Problems of Matrix Operations, McGraw.Hill, 1988.

2. Venkataraman M K, Higher Engineering Mathematics, National Pub. Co, 1992.

3. Elsgolts, L., Differential Equations and Calculus of Variations. Mir, 1977. 4. Sneddon,I.N., Elements of Partial differential equations, Dover Publications, 2006.

5. Sankara Rao, K., Introduction to partial differential equations. Prentice – Hall of India, 1995

6. Taha H A, “Operations research - An introduction, McMilan Publishing co, 1982.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 6 Questions of 5 Marks each uniformly distributed among all units – No Choice 30 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 14 Marks. 70 Marks


Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 6 Questions of 5 Marks each uniformly distributed among all units – No Choice 30 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 14 Marks 70 Marks


SPR5101 ADVANCED OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES L T P Credits Total Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To apply the concepts of optimization in Engineering problems.

To enable the students to use the concepts of non traditional optimization techniques in Engineering Design.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION 12 Hrs.

Engineering Applications of Optimization - Classification of Optimization Problems - Applications of Linear Programming –Problem Formulation-Standard Form of a Linear Programming Problem -Geometry of Linear Programming Problems- Solution by Simplex method- Sensitivity Analysis- Applications of Computer Softwares used in Optimization problems.

UNIT 2 MINIMIZATION METHODS 12 Hrs.

Introduction - Unimodal Function –Elimination Methods - Unrestricted Search - Search with Fixed Step Size - Search with Accelerated Step Size - Exhaustive Search - Dichotomous Search- Interval Halving Method - Fibonacci Method - Golden Section method - Comparison of Elimination Methods.

UNIT 3 DECISION ANALYSIS 12 Hrs. Decision Trees, Utility theory, Multi Objective Optimization, MCDM - Analytic Hierarchy Process (AHP), Analytic Network Process (ANP), Dynamic Programming - Multistage Decision Processes.

UNIT 4 UNCONSTRAINED OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES 12 Hrs. Multi variable unconstrained optimization techniques: Direct search methods: Random search method univariate method, pattern search method, steepest descent method and Conjugate gradient method.

UNIT 5 NON-TRADITIONAL OPTIMIZATION 12 Hrs.

Genetic Algorithms, Simulated Annealing, Neural Network, Optimization using fuzzy systems, Tabu Search and Scatter Search, Ant colony algorithm, Multi Response optimization - Gray Relational Analysis.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Rao, Singaresu, S., “Engineering Optimization – Theory & Practice”, New Age International (P) Limited, New Delhi, 2000

2. Kalyanmoy Deb, “Optimization for Engineering Design: Algorithms and Examples” ,Prentice-Hall of India Private Limited, 2005.

3. Kalyanmoy Deb, “Multi-Objective Optimization Using Evolutionary Algorithms”, Wiley, 2009.

4. Lihui Wang, Amos H. C. Ng, Kalyonmoy Deb, “Multi-Objective Evolutionary Optimisation for Product Design and Manufacturing”, Springer-Verlag London Limited, 2011.

5. Ravindran – Phillips –Solberg, “Operations Research – Principles and Practice”, John Wiley India, 2006.

6. Fredrick S.Hillier and G.J.Liberman, “Introduction to Operations Research”, McGraw Hill Inc. 1995.

7. Christos H. Papadimitriou, Kenneth Steiglitz, Combinatorial Optimization, PHI 2006

8. Johnson Ray, C., “Optimum design of mechanical elements”, Wiley, John & Sons, 1990.

9. Kalyanamoy Deb, “Optimization for Engineering design algorithms and Examples”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. 1995.

10. Goldberg, D.E., “Genetic algorithms in search, optimization and machine”, Barnen, Addison -Wesley, New York, 1989.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN


END SEMESTER QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 6 Questions of 3 Marks each uniformly distributed among all units – No Choice 30 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 14 Marks 70 Marks


SPR5102 MECHANICAL BEHAVIOUR OF ENGINEERING L T P C Max.Marks

MATERIALS 4 0 0 4 100

OBJECTIVES: To understand various properties of materials and its behavior in its usages for practical applications

UNIT 1: STRUCTURE OF SOLID MATERIAL & MECHANICAL BEHAVIOUR 12Hrs Structure of metals: Point, line and surface imperfection, relationship between structure and properties, theory of dislocations, strengthening mechanisms. Mechanical properties: Strength, hardness, toughness, ductility, stress-strain relationship, strains, true strains, strain hardening.

UNIT 2: STATIC MECHANICAL BEHAVIOUR FOR MULTIAXIAL STRESSES 12Hrs Stresses, Strains and Strain Energy for Combined Stresses, Theories of Strength, Application to Design.

UNIT 3: FATIGUE BEHAVIOR 12Hrs Introduction to fatigue. Characteristics and theories of fatigue failures. Fatigue testing machines, specimens, test procedures, method of presenting data, statistical analysis of fatigue results, factors affecting fatigue strength. Low cycle fatigue phenomenon, difference between low and high cycle fatigues, parameters influencing low cycle fatigue behavior. Cumulative fatigue damage, Effect of mean stress, combined stress fatigue, corrosion fatigue - current trends in fatigue testing.

UNIT 4: CREEP 12Hrs Introduction to creep - creep mechanisms, creep curve – Relaxation - Parameters influencing creep - Qualitative study of creep in tension, bending, torsion, buckling and combined stress.

UNIT 5: FRACTURE 12Hrs Linear elastic fracture mechanics, Griffith theory, Irwin- Orowan theory, ductile to brittle transition, fracture toughness , different modes of crack extension, concept of stress intensity factor, analysis of some typical crack problems, non-linear fracture on crack extension, concept of modified stress intensity factor, crack opening displacement and J- integrals, Fracture Resistance of Materials, Application of Fracture mechanics

Max: 60 Hours

REFERENCE BOOKS: 1. Joseph Marin. “Mechanical behavior of engineering materials”, prentice – Hall of India pvt,Ltd.,1966. 2. Kennedy, A.J., “Process of Creep and Fatigue of Metals”, Industrial Press,1958. 3. Forrest, P.G., “Fatigue of Metals“, Pregaman Press, 1961. 4. Knott, J.F., “Fundamentals of fracture mechanics “, Worths, 1979. 5. Fracture Mechanics Application - T. L. Anderson, CRC press 1998 6. Mechanical Metallurgy, GE Dieter, McGraw-Hill,1961 7. Mechanical Behavior of Materials, by William F. Hosford; Cambridge; Cambridge University Press, New York, 2010

SATHYABAMA UNIVERSITY FACULTY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


END SEMESTER QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 6 Questions of 4 Marks each uniformly distributed among all units – No Choice 30 Marks


SPR51 03 DESIGN FOR MANUFACTURE L T P Credits Total Marks

AND ASSEMBLY 4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To know the theory concepts of design for manufacturing and assembly

To know some aspects of the computer application in design for manufacturing and assembly.


General design principles for manufacturability - steps in Design process - strength and mechanical factors, mechanisms selection, evaluation method, Process capability - Feature tolerances Geometric tolerances - Assembly limits -Datum features - Tolerance stacks. Creativity in design - Materials: Types of materials-Composites and Nano materials, Selection of Materials for design Developments in Material technology - criteria for material selection — Material selection interrelationship with process selection, process selection charts.

UNIT 2 MACHINING PROCESS 12 Hrs.

Overview of various machining processes - general design rules for machining - Dimensional tolerance and surface roughness — Design for machining — Ease — Redesigning of components for machining ease with suitable examples.

UNIT 3 METAL CASTING 12 Hrs.

Introduction to different manufacturing processes -Appraisal of various casting processes, selection of casting process, - general design considerations for casting — casting tolerances — use of solidification simulation in casting design — product design rules for sand casting. Advantage and Disadvantage of castings.

UNIT 4 METAL JOINING 12 Hrs.

Introduction to different metal joining methods -Appraisal of various welding processes, Factors in design of weldments — general design guidelines — pre and post treatment of welds — effects of thermal stresses in weld joints — design of brazed joints. Forging — Design factors for Forging - Extrusion & Sheet Metal Work: Design guidelines for Extruded sections - design principles for Punching, Blanking, Bending, and Deep Drawing— Component Design for Blanking.

UNIT 5 DESIGN OF ASSEMBLY 12 Hrs.

Design for assembly fits in the design process, general design guidelines for manual assembly, development of the systematic DFA methodology, assembly efficiency, Identification of uneconomical design - Modifying the design - group technology - Computer Applications for DFMA. Design for Disassembly –Design for interchangeable-Ergonomics considerations in Design.

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Geoffrey Boothroyd, "Assembly Automation and Product Design", MarcelDekker Inc., NY, 1992.

2. Engineering Design – Material & Processing Approach – George E. Deiter, McGraw Hill Intl. 2nd Ed. 2000.

3. Geoffrey Boothroyd "Hand Book of Product Design" Marcel and Dekken, N.Y.1990.

4. Delbainbre, A "Computer Aided Assembly London, 1992. 5. Structural Approach, Field Stone Publisher, USA, 1995.



END SEMESTER QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 6 Questions of 5 Marks each uniformly distributed among all units – No Choice 30 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 14 Marks 70 Marks

SPR5104 PRODUCT DESIGN AND PLM L T P Credits Total Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To understand the various Design process involved in the product development cycle.

To understand the design steps involved in evaluating the dimensions of a component to satisfy functional

operation.

To learn standard practices by using CAD Software.

UNIT 1 INDRODUCTION OF PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT 12 Hrs.

Product development versus design, Types of design and redesign, modern production development process,

reverse engineering and redesign product development process, examples of product development process, scoping

product development – S-curve, new product development. Understanding Customer Needs- Gathering customer needs,

organizing and prioritizing customer needs, establishing product function, FAST method, establishing system

functionality.

UNIT 2 PRODUCT TEARDOWN AND EXPERIMENTATION 12 Hrs.

Tear down method, post teardown report, benchmarking and establishing engineering specifications, product

portfolios. Generating Concepts- Information gathering, brain ball, C-sketch/6-3-5 method, morphological analysis,

concept selection, technical feasibility, ranking, measurement theory.

UNIT 3 DESIGN FOR THE ENVIRONMENT AND PHYSICAL PROTOTYPE 12 Hrs.

DFE methods, life cycle assessment, weighted sum assessment method, techniques to reduce environmental

impact – disassembly, recyclability, remanufacturing regulations and standards. Types of prototypes, use of prototypes,

rapid prototyping technique scale, dimensional analysis and similitude, physical model and experimentation – design of

experiments, statistical analysis of experiments.

UNIT 4 PRODUCT DATA MANAGEMENT 12 Hrs.

Concepts in PDM – product life cycle, business objects, work flows, versions, views, product structure, change

processes, work list, information flow model in product development, engineering bill of materials and manufacturing

bill of materials. Product visualization- CAD neutral environment and visualization of products, standard software’s, use

of visualization in several stages of lifecycle, reviews, mark up – case studies.

UNIT 5 COMPONENTS OF PLM SOLUTIONS 12 Hrs.

Object oriented approach in product development solutions, phase gate process in product design – disparate

databases and connectivity, use of EAI technology (middleware) – cases for preparation of combined BOM and other

reports. Component supplier management and sourcing.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Kevin Otto and Kristin Wood, “Product Design – Techniques in Reverse Engineering and New Product

Development”, Pearson Education, 2010.

2. Karl T Ulrich and Stephen D Eppinger, “Product Design and Development”, McGraw Hill, 2010.

3. John Stark, “Global Product: Strategy, Product Lifecycle Management and the Billion Customer Question”, Springer

Publisher, 2007.

4. Michael Grieves, “Product Life Cycle Management”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006.

5. John Stark, “Product Lifecycle Management: 21 century paradigm for Product Realization”, Springer Publisher, 2005.


END SEMESTER QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 6 Questions of 6 Marks each uniformly distributed among all units – No Choice 30 Marks


SPR5105 ADVANCED STRENGTH OF MATERIALS L T P Credits Total Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To gain a thorough overview of the advanced strength of materials skills required for today's mechanical engineers.

To obtain an understanding of advanced strength of materials principles and practices that should assist them in solving complex problems.

To develop the framework for understanding how advanced strength of materials complements other mechanics technologies used in engineering organizations.

UNIT 1 ELASTICITY 12 Hrs. Stress-Strain relations and general equations of elasticity in Cartesian coordinates Differential equations of

equilibrium- Compatibility-boundary conditions- representation of 3-dimensional stress of a tensor- Generalized Hooke’s law- St.Venant’s principle-plane strain – plain stress- Analysis of stress and strain, Elasticity problems in two and three dimensions, Airy’s stress function in rectangular & polar coordinates.

UNIT 2 SHEAR CENTRE 12 Hrs. Location of Shear centre for various axi-symmetric and unsymmetrical sections- Shear flow. Unsymmetrical Bending: Stresses and deflections in beams subjected to unsymmetrical loading- Kern of a section.

UNIT 3 CURVED FLEXURAL MEMBERS 12 Hrs.

Winkler Bach formula for circumferential stress – Limitations – Correction factors, Circumferential and radial stresses-deflections of curved beam with restrained ends- closed ring subjected to concentrated load and uniform load – chain links and crane hooks.

UNIT 4 STRESSES IN FLAT PLATES 12 Hrs. Stresses in circular and rectangular plates due to various types of loading and end conditions. Torsion Of

Non-Circular Section - Torsion of rectangular cross sections- St. Venant’s theory – Elastic membrane Analogy – Prandtl’s stress function (Soap-Film) Analogy – Torsional stresses in hollow thin walled tubes ,Multiply connected Cross Section.

UNIT 5 DESIGN OF OFFSHORE STRUCTURES 12 Hrs.

Radial and tangential stresses in solid disc and ring of uniform thickness and varying thickness- allowable speeds. Theory of contact stresses, Assumptions on which a solution for contact stresses is based; Method of computing contact stresses; Deflection of bodies in point contact; Stresses for two bodies in contact over narrow rectangular area (Line contact), Loads normal to area; Stresses for two bodies in line contact, Normal and Tangent to contact area. - Deflection of bodies in point and line contact-Applications.

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Secly and Smith, “Advanced Mechanics of materials”, John Wiley International Edn, 1952.

2. Solecki, Roman and Conant, R. Jay, Advanced Mechanics of Materials, Oxford University Press, 2003 3. Den Hartong, “Advanced Strength of Materials”, McGraw Hill Book Co., New York, 1952.

4. Timoshenko and Goodier, “Theory of Elasticity”, McGraw Hill, 1987.

5. Wang, “Applied Elasticity”, McGraw Hill, 1953. 6. Boresi, Arthur P. and Schmidt, Richard J., Advanced Mechanics of Materials, 6th Ed., John Wiley & Sons, 2003

7. Robert D. Cook, Warren C. Young, “Advanced Mechanics of Materials”, Macmillian Pub. Co.,1952.


Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 7 Hrs.



M . E . / M . T e c h R E G U L A R 1 1 REGULATIONS 2015

SPR5106 ADVANCED VIBRATION ENGINEERING L T P Credits Total Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To understand theoretically the various systems of vibration.

To understand the practical approaches of different vibration systems.

UNIT 1 FUNDAMENTALS OF VIBRATION 12 Hrs.

Introduction -Sources of Vibration-Mathematical Models- Displacement, velocity and Acceleration-Introduction to Single Degree of Freedom Systems: Free, Forced, Damped and Undamped systems. Two Degree Freedom System: Free, Damped and Undamped systems -Forced Vibration with Harmonic Excitation System – Coordinate Couplings and Principal Coordinates.

UNIT 2 MULTI-DEGREE OF FREEDOM SYSTEMS 12 Hrs.

Introduction - Modeling of Continuous Systems as Multidegree of Freedom Systems - Using Newton’s Second Law to Derive Equations of Motion- Influence Coefficients – Based on Stiffness, Flexibility and Inertia – Eigen value Problem and its solution - Free and Forced Vibration of Un damped Systems Using Modal Analysis-Forced Vibration of Viscously Damped Systems - Self-Excitation and Stability Analysis.

UNIT 3 CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 12 Hrs.

Introduction - Transverse Vibration of a String or Cable and their Equations of Motion -Initial and Boundary Conditions - Free Vibration of a Uniform String-Free Vibration of a String with Both Ends Fixed -Longitudinal Vibration of a Bar or Rod -Equation of Motion and Solution - Orthogonality of Normal Functions.

UNIT 4 VIBRATION CONTROL 12 Hrs.

Introduction - Vibration Nomograph and Vibration Criteria - Reduction of Vibration at the Source - Balancing of Rotating Machines- Single-Plane Balancing - Two-Plane Balancing - Whirling of Rotating Shafts-Equations of Motion-Critical Speeds-Response of the System - Stability Analysis - Control of Vibration- Control of Natural Frequencies-Introduction of Damping - Vibration Isolation - Vibration Isolation System with Rigid Foundation , Base Motion and Flexible Foundation- Vibration Absorbers – Damped and Un damped Dynamic Vibration Absorber.

UNIT 5 VIBRATION MEASUREMENT AND APPLICATIONS 12 Hrs.

Introduction- Transducers - Piezoelectric Transducers- Electrodynamic Transducers - Linear Variable Differential Transformer Transducer- Vibration Pickups -Vibrometer -Accelerometer - Frequency-Measuring Instruments - Vibration Exciters -Mechanical Exciters -Electrodynamic Shaker - Signal Analysis - Spectrum Analyzers - Experimental Modal Analysis -Determination of Modal Data from Observed Peaks- Determination of Modal Data from Nyquist Plot - Measurement of Mode Shapes- Machine Condition Monitoring and Diagnosis - Machine Maintenance Techniques -Machine Condition Monitoring Techniques -Vibration Monitoring Techniques.

Max. 60 Hours


S A T H Y A B A M A U N I V E R S I T Y FACULTY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING





SPR5107 APPLICATIONS OF ROBUST DESIGN L T P Credits Total Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE • To impart knowledge about Design of Experiments, Taguchi’s Methods and Robust Design.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION 12 Hrs. Importance of experiments, experimental strategies, Planning of Experiments- Experimental design-basic

principles of Experimental design, terminology, steps in experimentation, sample size, normal probability plot, Simple linear regression models, Analysis of variance (ANOVA) – one way and two way.

UNIT 2 SINGLE FACTOR EXPERIMENTS 12 Hrs. Completely randomized design, Randomized block design, Latin square design, Statistical analysis and estimation of model parameters, model adequacy checking, pair wise comparison tests.

UNIT 3 MULTIFACTOR EXPERIMENTS 12 Hrs. Two and three factor full factorial experiments, Randomized block factorial design, Experiments with random factors, rules for expected mean squares, approximate F- tests. 2K factorial Experiments.

UNIT 4 ROBUST DESIGN PROCESS 12 Hrs. Classical design of Experiments- Taguchi’s design of experiments –Comparison of classical and Taguchi’

approach- Factor selection-variability due to noise factors- Principle of robustization, classification of quality characteristics and parameters, objective function in robust design, S/N ratios.

UNIT 5 TAGUCHI METHODS AND PRODUCT / PROCESS OPTIMIZATION 12 Hrs.

Orthogonal Arrays, Variable data analysis, Robust design- control and noise factors, S/N ratios, parameter design, Multi-level experiments, Inner and outer OA experiments, Optimization using S/N ratios, attribute date analysis, a critique of robust design.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Krishnaiah, K. and Shahabudeen, P. Applied Design of Experiments and Taguchi Methods, PHI learning private Ltd., 2012. 2. Montgomery, D.C., Design and Analysis of experiments, John Wiley and Sons, Eighth edition, 2012.

3. Nicolo Belavendram, Quality by Design; Taguchi techniques for industrial experimentation, Prentice Hall, 1995.

4. Phillip J.Rose, Taguchi techniques for quality engineering, McGraw Hill, 1996.

5. Montgomery, D.C., Design and Analysis of Experiments, Minitab Manual, John Wiley and Sons, Seventh edition, 2010.






SPR5108 ADVANCED MATERIAL TECHNOLOGY L T P Credits Total Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

• To introduce the various concepts of engineering materials & properties, metallurgical structure, structure, materials selection, analysis and manufacturing considerations based on material properties.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO FERROUS MATERIALS 12 Hrs.

Plain carbon steels, their properties and application: plain carbon steels, effects of alloying elements in plain carbon steels. Alloy steels, tools steels, stainless steels, low and high temperature resisting steels, high strength steels, selections, specifications, form and availability of steel. Cast irons-white, grey, modular malleable and alloy cast irons. Recognised pattern of distribution of graphite flakes in grey cast iron.

UNIT 2 INTRODUCTION TO HEAT TREATMENT AND NONFERROUS MATERIALS 12 Hrs.

TTT diagrams, annealing, normalizing, hardening and tempering of steel, Austempering and martempering of steel – Surface hardening of steel – Carburising, Nitriding, Carbonitriding, Cyaniding, Induction hardening – microscopic determination of case depth and depth of hardening. Ultra light materials – Properties and application, brasses, bronzes, copper-nickel alloys, aluminum, magnesium and titanium alloys, bearing materials – Heat treatment of nonferrous materials– Solutionizing, Aging and precipitation hardening.

UNIT 3 COMPOSITE AND SMART MATERIALS 12 Hrs.

Composites: Polymer – polymer, metal-metal, ceramic –ceramic, ceramic-polymer, metal-ceramic, metal-polymer composites. Dispersion reinforced, particle reinforced, laminated and fiber reinforced composites.

Smart Materials- Introduction, types and applications – shape memory alloys, hydrogen storage alloys, functionally gradient material (FGM) – Refractory materials and coatings for high temperature applications

UNIT 4 BIOMATERIALS 12 Hrs.

Classes and application of materials in medicine and dentistry – Stress strain behaviour of bone – The mechanical properties including elasticity, hardness, viscoelasticity, surface and fatigue properties of skin; soft tissues; bone; metals; polymers and ceramics. Biocompatible materials and its applications – The effects of degradation and corrosion.

UNIT 5 NUCLEAR MATERIALS 12 Hrs.

Introduction to nuclear materials – Materials for nuclear fuel in fission and fusion reactors, Fissile and fertile materials – Control & Construction Materials for Nuclear reactors, Moderators, Heat Exchangers – Radiation proof materials. Brief discussion of safety and radioactive waste disposal.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Biomaterials Science- An Introduction to Materials in Medicine. Buddy D.Rattner, A.S. Hoffman, F.J. Sckoen, and J.E.L Emons, Academic Press, second edition, 2004.

2. Biomaterials: An Introduction (second edition) Joon B.Park & Roderic S.Lakes, Plenum Press, 1992.

3. W.D. Callister, Jr, - Material Science & Engineering Addition-Wesly Publishing Co.

5. Van Vlash - Elements of Material Science & Engineering John Wiley & Sons.

6. Gandhi, M.V., Thompson, B.S., Smart Materials and Structures, Chapman and Hall.






SPR5109 ADVANCED TOOL ENGINEERING L T P Credits Total Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To understand the various procedures involved in manufacturing of tools.

To understand the design steps for various types of tool.

To know the function of work holding device in production of various components.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO TOOL ENGINEERING 12 Hrs.

Introduction – Classifications– Tool Design Objectives – Tool Design in manufacturing- Challenges , Standards

in tool design-Tool drawings -Surface finish – Fits and Tolerances - Tooling Materials- Ferrous and Non ferrous Tooling

Materials-Carbides, Ceramics and Diamond -Non metallic tool materials-Designing with relation to heat treatment.

UNIT 2 DESIGN OF CUTTING TOOLS 12 Hrs.

Basic Requirements -Mechanics and Geometry of Chip Formation -General Considerations for Metal Cutting -

Design of single point Cutting Tools , Milling Cutters ,Drilling and Reamers - Shank Size for Single point Carbide Tools-

Thickness for Carbide Tools -Chip Breakers -Design of form tools.

UNIT 3 WORK HOLDING TOOLS 12 Hrs.

Basic requirements of work holding devices – Principles , Methods and Devices - Definition and types of Drill

Jigs -Chip Formation in Drilling - General Considerations in the Design of Drill Jigs - Drill Bushings. Fixtures - Types of

Fixtures - Milling Fixtures, Boring Fixtures, Broaching Fixtures, Lathe Fixtures, Grinding Fixtures.

UNIT 4 INTRODUCTION TO PRESS WORKING 12 Hrs.

Press working terminology - Basic operations - Types of Presses - Mechanical, Hydraulic, Pneumatic - Die sets,

Types of Dies -Simple, Compound, Progressive, Combination and Inverted Dies - Types of Punches - Methods of

reduction of Shear force - Types of Strip layouts ,Strippers, Pilots, Stoppers - Selection of Dowel pins and Allen screws -

Design of Blanking Die.

UNIT 5 TOOL DESIGN FOR CNC MACHINE TOOLS 12 Hrs.

Introduction –Tooling requirements for Numerical control systems – Fixture design for CNC machine tools-Sub

plate and Tombstone fixtures-Universal fixtures– Cutting tools– Tool holding methods– Automatic Tool Changers and

Tool Positioners – Tool Pre setting– General explanation of the Brown and Sharp machine.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Cyrll Donaldson, George H.LeCain, V.C. Goold, “Tool Design”, TataMcGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., 2000.

2. Hoffman, E.G.” Jig and Fixture Design”, Thomson Asia Pvt Ltd,Singapore, 2004

3. Prakash Hiralal Joshi, “Tooling data”, Wheeler Publishing, 2000

4. Venkataraman K., “Design of Jigs, Fixtures and Press tools”, TMH, 2005

5. Haslehurst M., “Manufacturing Technology”, The ELBS, 1978.

S A T H Y A B A M A I N S T I T U T E O F S C I E N C E A N D T E C H N O L O G Y FACULTY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING





SPR51 10 MECHANICS OF METAL FORMING L T P Credits Total Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To study the basic concepts and calculation of force in different metal forming techniques

To study various thermo mechanical property changes during forming.

UNIT 1 BASICS OF METAL FORMING 12 Hrs.

Stress and strain-Principal stresses-Mohr’s circle, Isotropic elasticity, strain energy. Plasticity- Yield, Tresca, V o n Mises Criterion, Effective

stress and strain, Flow rules- Normality principle. Strain hardening tests- tensile, compression, plane strain compression, bulge and torsion testing.

UNIT 2 FORMABILITY AND BENDING OF METALS 12 Hrs.

Ductility, Ductile fracture-Hydrostatic stress analysis-Bulk formability tests- hot forming. Bending- Sheet bending, bending with super

imposed tension- Shift in Young’s Modulus after unloading.

UNIT 3 PLASTIC ANISOTROPY AND FORMING LIMIT 12 Hrs.

Hill’s anisotropic plasticity theory-Hill’s yield criterion-Non quadratic yield criteria-Anisotropy calculations from crystallographic considerations.

Localised necking and forming limit diagrams-experimental determination and calculation- factors affecting forming limits- Stress based forming

limits.

UNIT 4 SLIP LINE FIELD ANALYSIS 12 Hrs.

Upper bounds-Energy dissipation on plane of shear and slip line field-plane strain extrusion, indentation, compression with and without

friction- Governing stress equations and boundary conditions-metal distortion- constant shear stress interface. Redundant deformation-

Inhomogeneity, internal d a m a g e and residual stresses.

UNIT 5 SHEET METAL WORKING 12 Hrs.

Anisotropy, strain hardening and tooling effects in cup drawing, redrawing, ironing, progressive forming-Residual stresses- strain

distribution in stamping-die design- Roll forming, spinning- incremental sheet forming, flanging, hole expansion and beading. Hydroforming.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Hosford.W.F and Caddell.R.M, “Metal forming: Mechanics and Metallurgy”, Cambridge University Press, 2011.

2. Marciniak.Z, Duncan.J.L, Hu.S.J, “Mechanics of sheet metal forming”, Butterworth-Heinemann,2002.

3. Banabic, D. “Formability of metallic materials”, Springer science and Business media, 2000.

4. Uday Dixit.S, Narayanan, Ganesh.R, “Metal forming:Technology and Process modeling”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2013.


SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY F A C U L T Y O F M E C H A N I C A L E N G I N E E R I N G




M . E . / M . T e c h R E G U L A R 1 2 R E G U L A T I O N S 2 0 1 5

SPR5111 MANUFACTURING, METROLOGY AND L T P Credits Total Marks

QUALITY CONTROL 4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

Assimilation of basic concepts to impart use, Manufacturing, application of Metrology and quality control

Exposure to quality in Manufacturing Engineering.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO METROLOGY 12 Hrs.

Definition of metrology, Categories of metrology, Scientific metrology, Industrial metrology, Legal metrology, Need

of inspection - Precision, Accuracy, Sensitivity, Readability, Calibration, Traceability, Reproducibility, Sources of errors,

Factors affecting accuracy, Selection of instrument, Precautions while using an instruments for getting higher precision and

accuracy.

UNIT 2 LASER METROLOGY 12 Hrs.

Introduction – types of lasers – laser in engineering metrology – metrological laser methods for applications in

machine systems – Interferometry applications – speckle interferometry – laser interferometers in manufacturing and

machine tool alignment testing – calibration systems for industrial robots laser Doppler technique – laser Doppler

anemometry.

UNIT 3 PRECISION INSTRUMENTS BASED ON LASER 12 Hrs.

Laser telemetric systems – detection of microscopic imperfections on high quality surface Pitter NPL gauge

interferometer – classification of optical scanning systems – high inertia laser scan technique – rotating mirror technique –

laser gauging – bar coding – laser dimensional measurement system.

UNIT 4 OPTO ELECTRONICS AND VISION SYSTEM 12 Hrs.

Opto electronic devices – CCD – On-line and in-process monitoring in production –applications image analysis and

computer vision – Image analysis techniques – spatical feature – Image extraction – segmentation – digital image

processing – Vision system for measurement – Comparison laser scanning with vision system.

UNIT 5 QUALITY IN MANUFACTURING ENGINEERING 12 Hrs.

Basics of quality – process capability analysis – quality gurus and their philosophies, Quality standards – ISO 9000

series and 14000 series –, Importance of manufacturing planning for quality – concepts of controllability – need for quality

management system and models – quality engineering tools and techniques – statistical process control – six sigma concepts

– Poka Yoke – Computer controlled systems used in inspection. Quality function deployment – FMEA – Quality circles -

Total quality management –Kaizen.

Max. 60 Hours


1. John A. Bosch, Giddings and Lewis Dayton, Co-ordinate Measuring Machines and Systems, Marcel Dekker, Inc, 1999.

2. Zuech, Nello Understanding and Applying Machine Vision, Marcel Dekker, Inc, 2000

3. Collet C.V. and Hope A.D. "Engineering Measurements", ELBS Edition 1983

4. Donald P. Eckman, "Industrial Instrumentation", Wiley Eastern, 1985.

SPR5112

ADVANCED WELDING TECHNOLOGY L T P Credits Total Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To gain a thorough overview of the advanced welding technology skills required for today's mechanical engineers.

To obtain an understanding of advanced welding technology principles and practices that should assist them in solving joining problems.

UNIT 1 SOLID STATE WELDING PROCESSES 12 Hrs.

Fundamental principles, review of the various pressure welding processes and their applications. Friction, Friction stir welding, explosive, diffusion, and Ultrasonic welding – principles of operation, process characteristics and application, Welding defects and remedies, Testing and inspection of welds.

UNIT 2 HIGH ENERGY BEAM WELDING 12 Hrs.

Heat generation and regulation, equipment details in typical set-up, Electron beam welding in different degrees of vacuum, advantages, disadvantages and applications. Laser Welding - Principles of operation, limitations and applications.

UNIT 3 ELECTRO SLAG WELDING 12 Hrs. Heat generation, principles of operations - wire and consumables - guide techniques - selection of current - voltage

and other process variables - nature of fluxes and their selection. Electro-gas welding - Principle and applications - Narrow gap welding.

UNIT 4 PLASMA ARC WELDING 12 Hrs.

Special features of plasma arc- transferred and non transferred arc, key hole and puddle-in mode of operation, micro, low and high current plasma arc welding and their applications, plasma cutting, surfacing and applications.

UNIT 5 OTHER WELDING PROCESSES AND STANDARDS 12 Hrs.

Adhesive bonding and welding of plastics - Cold pressure welding - High frequency Welding - Stud welding - Under Water welding - types of Application, Welding automation - seam tracking and arc sensing – welding robots. Introduction to materials standards and testing of materials, consumables testing and qualification as per ASME/AWS requirements.

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Parmer R.S., “Welding Engineering and Technology”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 1997.

2. Parmer R.S., “Welding Processes and Technology”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 1992.

3. Little R.L., “Welding and welding Technology”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co., Ltd., New Delhi, 1989.

4. AWS- Welding Hand Book. 8th Edition. Vol- 2. “Welding Process” 5. Nadkarni S.V. “Modern Arc Welding Technology”, Oxford IBH Publishers.

6. Christopher Davis. “Laser Welding- Practical Guide”. Jaico Publishing House.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 PART A : 6 Questions of 5 Marks each uniformly distributed among all units – No Choice PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 14 Marks

m Duration : 3 Hrs. 30 Marks 70 Marks


SPR51 13 ADVANCED MANUFACTURING PROCESS L T P Credits Total Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

• To understand special machining processes, unconventional machining processes, micro machining process, nano fabrication processes and rapid prototyping.

UNIT 1 UNCONVENTIONAL MACHINING 12 Hrs.

Introduction-Bulk processes - surface processes- Plasma Arc Machining- Laser Beam Machining- Electron Beam Machining-Electrical Discharge Machining – Electro chemical Machining-Ultrasonic Machining- Water Jet Machining-Electro Gel Machining-Anisotropic machining-Isotropic machining- Elastic Emission machining – Ion Beam Machining.

UNIT 2 NANO POLISHING AND PRECISION MACHINING 12 Hrs.

Abrasive Flow finishing – Magnetic Abrasive Finishing – Magneto rheological finishing – Magneto Rheological abrasive flow finishing - Magnetic Float polishing – Elastic Emission Machining – chemo- mechanical Polishining. Ultra Precision turning and grinding: Chemical Mechanical Polishing (CMP) - ELID process – Partial ductile mode grinding-Ultra precision grinding- Binder less wheel – Free form optics.

UNIT 3 ADVANCES IN METAL FORMING 12 Hrs. Orbital forging, Isothermal forging, Warm forging, Overview of Powder Metal techniques –Hot and Cold isostatic

pressing - high speed extrusion, rubber pad forming, micro blanking –Powder rolling – Tooling and process parameters.

UNIT 4 MICRO MACHINING AND NANO FABRICATION 12 Hrs.

Theory of micromachining-Chip formation-size effect in micromachining-micro turning, micromilling, micro drilling -Micro EDM-Microware EDM-Nano fabrication: LIGA, Ion beam etching, Molecular manufacturing techniques –Atomic machining- Nano machining techniques – Top/Bottom up Nano fabrication techniques - Sub micron lithographic technique, conventional film growth technique, Chemical etching, Quantum dot fabrication techniques – MOCVD – Epitaxy techniques.

UNIT 5 NANO METROLOGY AND SURFACE MODIFICATION TECHNIQUES 12 Hrs.

Surface texture measurement – surface integrity measurement – talysurf profilometer – scanning electron microscope – atomic force microscope – scanning tunneling microscope - commercialization issues of micro-nano technology. Surface modification Techniques: Sputtering- CVD-PVD-Diamond like carbon coating-Plasma Spraying Technique. 3D PRINTING: Working principle - description of the equipment benefits – application.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Franssila. S., “Introduction to Micro Fabrication”, John Wiley and sons Ltd., UK, 2004, ISBN: 978- 0-470-85106-7

2. Benedict, G.F.,"Non Traditional manufacturing Processes",CRC press,201 1

3. McGeough,J.A.,"Advanced methods of Machining",Springer,201 1

4. Narayanaswamy, R., Theory of Metal Forming Plasticity, Narosa Publishers,1989.

5. Pandley, P.S. and Shah.N., “Modern Manufacturing Processes”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1980.

6. Jackson, M.J., “Micro fabrication and Nanomanufacturing”, CRC Press, 2006.

7. Zant, P.V., “Microchip fabrication”, McGraw Hill, 2004.

8. Busnaina, A., “Nanomanufacturing Handbook”, CRC Press, London, 2006.

CODE BOOKS

1. IS 4998 (PART 1) : 1992 Criteria For Design Of Reinforced Concrete Chimneys.

2. IS 2974 (PART 1 to PART 5) : Design And Construction of Machine Foundations.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 PART A : 6 Questions of 5 Marks each uniformly distributed among all units – No Choice PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 14 Marks

m Duration : 3 Hrs. 30 Marks 70 Marks


SPR5201 APPLIED FINITE ELEMENT METHODS L T P Credits Total Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To understand the basic principles of the finite element analysis techniques

To effectively use the tools of the analysis for solving practical problems arising in engineering design.


Basic concepts – examples variational formulation and approximation- Rayleigh Ritz method- the method of weighted

residuals- time dependent problems.

UNIT 2 FEA OF ONE DIMENSIONAL PROBLEM 12 Hrs.

Discretization of the domain into elements – derivation of element equations – assembly of element equations-

imposition of boundary conditions- solution of equations- post processing of the solution. One dimensional heat transfer

element – application to one-dimensional heat transfer problems.

UNIT 3 FEA OF TWO DIMENSIONAL PROBLEMS 12 Hrs.

Description of the model equation- variation formulation – finite element formulation- interpolation functions- 3

noded triangular elements-four noded rectangular, higher order elements-computation of element matrices-assembly of

the element matrices- Applications to heat transfer in 2- Dimension – Application to problems in fluid mechanics in 2-D.

UNIT 4 MESH GENERATION AND ISOPERIMETRIC ELEMENTS 12 Hrs.

Discretization of a domain- triangular elements – rectangular elements- the serendipity elementsisoperimetric

elements and numerical integration- interpolation functions. Approximation errors in the finite element method- various

measures of errors- accuracy of the solution. Lagrangian and serendipity elements – Shape function.

UNIT 5 SPECIAL TOPICS 12 Hrs.

Eigen value problems- plain stress strain problems- three dimensional elements- equations of motion based on

weak form –longitudinal vibration of bars – transverse vibration of beams -Transient vibration Analysis- P and H methods

of mesh refinement-Applications of FEM concept to solve simple problems using ANSYS.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Krishnamoorthy,C.S.,”Finite Element Analysis- Theory and programming “, Tata McGraw –Hill publishing Co., 1987.

2. Desai,C.S.,”Elementary Finite Element Method”,Prentice-Hall, Engle wood cliffs,N.J., 1979.

3. Zienkiewicz, O.C.,”The Finite Element method in Reddy, J.N.,”An introduction to the Finite Element method “, McGraw –

Hill Book Companylj Newyork, 1984.Engg. Science”, McGraw-Hill, London,1977.

4. Forray, M.J.”Variational calculus in Science Engg.,McGraw- Hill,NewYork,1968.

5. Cheung, Y.K. and Yeo, M.F.”A practical introduction to Finite Element Analysis”, Ptiman, London, 1979.

6. Heinemann(An imprint of Elsevier), reprinted 2006,2007, Published by Elsevier India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, Indian

Reprint ISBN: 978-81-8147-885-6

7. Huebner,K.H., Dewhirst,D.L.,Smith,D.E & Byron,T.G., “The Finite Element Method for Engineers”, Wiley Student Edition,

Fourth Edition 2004,John Wiley&Sons(Asia)Pve.Ltd., ISBN: 9812-53-154-8

8. Ramamurthi, V., “Finite Element Method in Machine Design”, Narosa Publishing House, January 2009, ISBN:

978-81-7319-965-3.






SPR5202 FLEXIBLE MANUFACTURING SYSTEM L T P Credits Total Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

• To impart knowledge on Flexible Manufacturing Systems, FMS equipment, group technology, simulation and Application

of FMS.


FMS definition and classification of manufacturing systems, Automated production cycle, Need of flexibility,

Concept of flexibility, Types of flexibilities and its measurement – Development of manufacturing systems – benefits –

major elements. Factors responsible for the growth of FMS, FMS types and applications, Economic justification for FMS.

UNIT 2 FMS EQUIPMENT 12 Hrs.

Abrasive Flow finishing – Magnetic Abrasive Finishing – Magneto rheological finishing – Magneto Rheological

abrasive flow finishing - Magnetic Float polishing – Elastic Emission Machining – chemo- mechanical Polishining. Ultra

Precision turning and grinding: Chemical Mechanical Polishing (CMP) - ELID process – Partial ductile mode grinding-Ultra

precision grinding- Binder less wheel – Free form optics.

UNIT 3 SCHEDULING, COMPUTER CONTROL AND FMS SIMULATION 12 Hrs.

FMS Scheduling - single product, single batch, n – batch scheduling problem – knowledge based scheduling

system. Hierarchy of computer control –computer control of work center and assembly lines – FMS supervisory computer

control – types of software specification and selection – Application of simulation–model of FMS–simulation software –

limitation – manufacturing data systems–data flow–FMS database systems–planning for FMS database.

UNIT 4 GROUP TECHNOLOGY 12 Hrs.

GT concepts, Advantages of GT, Part family formation-coding and classification systems; knowledge based system

for group technology - Part- machine group analysis, Methods for cell formation, Use of different algorithms, mathematical

programming and graph theoretic model approach for part grouping, Cellular vs FMS production.

UNIT 5 APPLICATIONS OF FMS 12 Hrs.

FMS application in machining, sheet metal fabrication, prismatic component production – aerospace application –

FMS development towards factories of the future – artificial intelligence and expert systems in FMS – design philosophy

and characteristics for future.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Jha, N.K. “Handbook of flexible manufacturing systems”, Academic Press Inc.,1 991.

2. Radhakrishnan P. and Subramanyan S., “CAD/CAM/CIM”, Wiley Eastern Ltd.,New Age International Ltd., 1994.

3. Raouf, A. and Ben-Daya, M., Editors, “Flexible manufacturing systems: recent development”, Elsevier Science, 1995.

4. Groover M.P., “Automation, production systems and computer integrated manufacturing”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt., New

Delhi, 1996.

5. Kalpakjian, “Manufacturing engineering and technology”, Addison-Wesley Publishing Co., 1995.

6. Taiichi Ohno, “Toyota production system: beyond large-scale production”, Productivity Press (India) Pvt. Ltd. 1992.






SME5101 ADVANCED FLUID MECHANICS L T P Credits Total Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

• To impart knowledge of various basic principles and equations of fluid flow, exact and approximate solutions of

Navier-Stokes equations under various flow conditions and introducing concepts in compressible flow normal shock, oblique shock and Fanno flow and Rayleigh flow.

UNIT 1 INVISCID FLOW OF INCOMPRESSIBLE FLUIDS 12 Hrs. Lagrangian and Eulerain Descriptions of fluid motion- Path lines, Stream lines, Streak lines, stream tubes –

velocity of a fluid particle, types of flows, Equations of three dimensional continuity equation- Stream function and Velocity potential functions - Basic Laws of fluid Flow: Condition for irrotationality, circulation & vorticity Accelerations in Cartesian systems normal and tangential accelerations, Euler’s, Bernouli’s equations in 3D– Continuity and Momentum Equations.

UNIT 2 VISCOUS FLOW 12 Hrs. Derivation of Navier-Stoke’s Equations for viscous in compressible flow – Exact solutions to certain simple cases: Plain

Poisoulle flow - Coutte flow with and without pressure gradient – Hagen Poisoulle flow - Blasius solution.

UNIT 3 BOUNDARY LAYER CONCEPTS 12 Hrs. Prandtl’s contribution to real fluid flows – Prandtl’s boundary layer theory - Boundary layer thickness for flow over

a flat plate – Approximate solutions – Creeping motion (Stokes) –Oseen’s approximation - Von-Karman momentum integral equation for laminar boundary layer –– Expressions for local and mean drag coefficients for different velocity profiles.

UNIT 4 TURBULENT FLOW 12 Hrs.

Introduction to Turbulent Flow: Fundamental concept of turbulence –Time Averaged Equations – Boundary Layer Equations - Prandtl Mixing Length Model - Universal Velocity Distribution Law: Van Driest Model–Approximate solutions for drag coefficients – More Refined Turbulence Models – k-epsilon model - boundary layer separation and form drag – Karman Vortex Trail, Boundary layer control, lift on circular cylinders - Internal Flow: Smooth and rough boundaries – Equations for Velocity Distribution and frictional Resistance in smooth / rough Pipes – Roughness of Commercial Pipes – Moody’s diagram.

UNIT 5 COMPRESSIBLE FLUID FLOW 12 Hrs.

Compressible Fluid Flow – I: Thermodynamic basics – Equations of continuity, Momentum and Energy - Acoustic Velocity Derivation of Equation for Mach Number – Flow Regimes – Mach Angle – Mach Cone – Stagnation State - Compressible Fluid Flow – II: Area Variation, Property Relationships in terms of Mach number, Nozzles, Diffusers – Fanno and Raleigh Lines, Property Relations – Isothermal Flow in Long Ducts – Normal Compressible Shock, Oblique Shock: Expansion and Compressible Shocks – Supersonic Wave Drag.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Streeter, V.L., Wylie, E.B., and Bedford, K.W., Fluid Mechanics, WCB McGraw Hill, Boston, 1998.

2. Muralidhar, K. and Biswas, G., Advanced fluid mechanics, Narosa publications, 1996.

3. Munson, B.R., Young, D.F. and Okiisi, T.H., Fundamentals of Fluid Mechanics, John Wiley andSons Inc., NewYork, 1990 4. White, F.M. Fluid Mechanics, McGraw-Hill publications, 1985.

5. Aswatha Narayana, P.A. & Seetharamu, K.N. Engineering Fluid Mechanics, Narosa publications, 2005.






SME5102 ADVANCED THERMODYNAMICS L T P Credits Total Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To achieve an understanding of basic principle and scope of thermodynamics.

To predict the availability and irreversibility associated with the thermodynamic processes.

To analyze the properties of ideal and real gas mixtures and to understand the basic concepts of combustions.

UNIT 1 REVIEW OF THERMODYNAMIC LAWS AND COROLLARIES 13 Hrs.

Transient flow analysis, Second law thermodynamics, Entropy, Availability and unavailability, Thermodynamic potential. Maxwell relations, Specific heat relations, Mayer's relation. Evaluation of thermodynamic properties of working substance.

UNIT 2 P.V.T SURFACE 13 Hrs.

Equation of state. Real gas behavior, Vander Waal's equation, Generalization compressibility factor. Energy properties of real gases. Vapour pressure, Clausius, Clapeyron equation. Throttling, Joule Thompson coefficient. Non reactive mixtures of perfect gases. Governing laws, Evaluation of properties, Psychometric mixture properties and psychometric chart, Air conditioning processes, cooling towers. Real gas mixture.

UNIT 3 COMBUSTION 12 Hrs.

Combustion Reactions, Enthalpy of formation. Entropy of formation, Reference levels of tables. Energy of formation, Heat reaction, Adiabatic flame temperature generated product, Enthalpies, Equilibrium. Chemical equilibrium of ideal gases, Effect of non reacting gases equilibrium in multiple reactions, The vent hoff’s equation. The chemical potential and phase equilibrium. The Gibbs phase rule.

UNIT 4 POWER CYCLES 12 Hrs.

Review binary vapour cycle, co generation and combined cycles, Second law analysis of cycles. Refrigeration cycles. Thermodynamics of irreversible processes. Introduction to Phenomenological laws, Onsaga Reciprocity relation, Applicability of the Phenomenological relations, Heat flux and entropy production, Thermodynamic phenomena, Thermo electric circuits.

UNIT 5 DIRECT ENERGY CONVERSION 10 Hrs. Introduction to fuel cells, Thermo electric energy, Thermoionic power generation, Thermodynamic devices Magneto hydrodynamic generations, Photovoltaic cells, Thermoacoustic refrigeration systems.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Rogers and Mayhew, Engineering Thermodynamics, 4th Edition, Addison Wesley 1999.

2. Dhar, PL. Engineering Thermodynamics, Elsevier. (A Division of Reed Elsevier India Pvt. Limited), 2008

3. Sonntag, R. E., and G. J. Van Wylen: Introduction to Thermodynamics—Classic and Statistical, 3rd edition, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1991

4. Doolittle-Messe., Thermodynamics for Engineers, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1995

5. Holman.J.P. Thermodynamics, 3rd Edition, McGraw-Hill, 1995.


Max. Marks : 100

PART A : 6 Questions of 5 Marks each uniformly distributed among all units – No Choice

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 14 Marks

m Duration : 3 Hrs.

30 Marks

70 Marks

SPR5103

ADVANCED HEAT TRANSFER L T P Credits Total Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To develop the ability to use the heat transfer concepts for various applications like finned systems, turbulence

flows, high speed flows.

To perform the thermal analysis and sizing of heat exchangers and to learn the heat transfer coefficient for compact

heat exchanges.

To achieve an understanding of the basic concepts of phase change processes and mass transfer.

UNIT 1 CONDUCTION AND RADIATION HEAT TRANSFER 12 Hrs.

One dimensional energy equations and boundary condition - two and three-dimensional heat conduction

equations - extended surface heat transfer - conduction with moving boundaries - radiation in gases and vapour. Gas

radiation and radiation heat transfer in enclosures containing absorbing and emitting media – interaction of radiation

with conduction and convection, shape factor algebra.

UNIT 2 TURBULENT NATURAL/ FORCED CONVECTIVE HEAT TRANSFER 12 Hrs.

Momentum and energy equations - turbulent boundary layer heat transfer - mixing length concept - turbulence

model – k Є model - analogy between heat and momentum transfer – Reynolds & Colburn analogies, Prandtl mixing

length, turbulent flow in a tube - high speed flows, Natural convection over vertical surfaces, bank of tubes, Natural

convection in enclosures, Rayleigh Bernard convection cells, mixed convection.

UNIT 3 PHASE CHANGE HEAT TRANSFER AND HEAT EXCHANGER 12 Hrs.

Condensation- film condensation ,dropwise condensation over walls and bank of tubes - boiling – pool and flow

boiling - heat exchanger -Є – NTU approach and design procedure - compact heat exchangers.

UNIT 4 NUMERICAL METHODS IN HEAT TRANSFER 12 Hrs.

Finite difference formulation of steady and transient heat conduction problems – discretization schemes –

explicit - Crank Nicolson and fully implicit schemes - control volume formulation –steady one-dimensional convection

and diffusion problems - calculation of the flow field – SIMPLE/SIMPLER Algorithms.

UNIT 5 MASS TRANSFER AND ENGINE HEAT TRANSFER CORRELATION 12 Hrs.

Mass transfer - vaporization of droplets - combined heat and mass transfers - heat transfer correlations in various

applications like I.C. engines - compressors and turbines.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Yunus A. Cengel, Heat Transfer A Practical Approach, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2004.

2. Frank P. Incropera and David P. Dewitt, Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer, John Wiley & Sons, 1998.

3. Ozisik N.M., Heat Transfer, McGraw Hill Book Company, 1988.

4. Holman J.P., Heat Transfer, McGraw Hill Book Company, 1989

5. Rajput R.K., Heat and Mass transfer, S.Chand & Co, 1983.






SME5104 FUELS, COMBUSTION L T P Credits Total Marks

AND EMISSION CONTROL 4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To provide information on various types of fuels, their property and characterization and understand the

thermodynamics and kinetics of combustion.

To identify the nature and extent of the problem of pollutant formation and Control in internal combustion engines.

UNIT 1 CHARACTERIZATION 12 Hrs.

Fuels - Types and Characteristics of Fuels - Determination of Properties of Fuels - Fuels Analysis -Proximate

and Ultimate Analysis - Moisture Determination - Calorific Value - Gross & Net Calorific Values - Calorimetry -

DuLong’s Formula for CV Estimation - Flue gas Analysis - Orsat Apparatus -Fuel & Ash Storage & Handling -

Spontaneous Ignition Temperatures.

UNIT 2 SOLID FUELS & LIQUID FUELS 12 Hrs.

Types - Coal Family - Properties - Calorific Value - ROM, DMMF, DAF and Bone Dry Basis - Ranking - Bulk &

Apparent Density - Storage - Washability - Coking & Caking Coals – Renewable Solid Fuels - Biomass - Wood Waste -

Agro Fuels - Manufactured Solid Fuels. Liquid Fuels Types - Sources - Petroleum Fractions - Classification - Ref ining -

Properties of Liquid Fuels -Calorific Value, Specific Gravity, Flash & Fire Point, Octane Number, Cetane Number etc, -

Alcohols -Tar Sand Oil - Liquefaction of Solid Fuels.

UNIT 3 GASEOUS FUELS 12 Hrs.

Classification - Composition & Properties - Estimation of Calorific Value - Gas Calorimeter. Rich & Lean Gas -

Wobbe Index - Natural Gas - Dry & Wet Natural Gas - Stripped NG - Foul & Sweet NG - LPG - LNG - CNG - Methane -

Producer Gas - Gasifiers - Water Gas - Town Gas - Coal Gasification - Gasification Efficiency - Non - Thermal Route -

Biogas - Digesters - Reactions - Viability -Economics.

UNIT 4 COMBUSTION - STOICHIOMETRY & KINETICS 12 Hrs.

Stoichiometry - Mass Basis & Volume Basis - Excess Air Calculation - Fuel & Flue Gas Compositions -

Calculations - Rapid Methods - Combustion Processes - Stationary Flame - Surface or Flameless Combustion -

Submerged Combustion - Pulsating & Slow Combustion Explosive Combustion. Mechanism of Combustion - Ignition &

Ignition Energy - Spontaneous Combustion – Flame Propagation - Solid, Liquid & Gaseous Fuels Combustion - Flame

Temperature - Theoretical, Adiabatic & Actual - Ignition Limits - Limits of Inflammability.

UNIT 5 COMBUSTION - EQUIPMENTS AND EMISSION 12 Hrs.

Coal Burning Equipments - Types - Pulverized Coal Firing - Fluidized Bed Firing - Fixed Bed & Recycled Bed -

Cyclone Firing - Spreader Stokers - Vibrating Grate Stokers - Sprinkler Stokers, Traveling Grate Stokers. Oil Burners -

Vaporizing Burners, Atomizing Burners - Design of Burners. Gas Burners - Atmospheric Gas Burners - Air Aspiration

Gas Burners - Burners Classification according to Flame Structures - Factors Affecting Burners & Combustion.

Emissions - Emission index - Corrected concentrations - Control of emissions for premixed and non-premixed

combustion.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Samir Sarkar, Fuels & Combustion, 2nd Edition, Orient Longman, 1990.

2. Sharma SP, Mohan Chander, Fuels & Combustion, Tata McGraw Hill, 1984.

3. Bhatt, Vora Stoichiometry, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 1984.

4. Blokh AG,Heat Transfer in Steam Boiler Furnace, Hemisphere Publishing Corpn, 1988.

5. Civil Davies, Calculations in Furnace Technology, Pergamon Press, Oxford, 1966.






SME51 05 INSTRUMENTATION IN THERMAL ENGINEERING L T P Credits Total Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To provide knowledge on various measuring instruments.

To provide knowledge on advanced measurement techniques.

To understand the various steps involved in error analysis and uncertainty analysis.

UNIT 1 MEASURMENT CHARACTERISTICS 12 Hrs.

Instrument Classification, Characteristics of Instruments – Static and dynamic, experimental error analysis,

Systematic and random errors, Statistical analysis, Uncertainty, Experimental planning and selection of measuring

instruments, Reliability of instruments.

UNIT 2 MICROPROCESSORS AND COMPUTERS IN MEASURMENT 12 Hrs.

Data logging and acquisition – use of sensors for error reduction, elements of micro computer interfacing, intelligent

instruments in use.

UNIT 3 MEASURMENT OF PHYSICAL QUANTITIES 12 Hrs.

Measurement of thermo-physical properties, instruments for measuring temperature, pressure, velocity and flow rate

, use of sensors for physical variables ,measurement of emissivity.

UNIT 4 ADVANCED MEASURMENT TECHNIQUES 12 Hrs.

Shadowgraph, Schlieren, Interferometer, Laser Doppler Anemometer, PIV (Particle Image Velocimetry), Hot wire

Anemometer, heat flux sensors, Telemetry in measurement.

UNIT 5 MEASURMENT ANALYSERS 12 Hrs.

Orsat apparatus, Gas Analysers, Smoke meters, gas chromatography, spectrometry.Noise pollution and its

impact - oil pollution - pesticides - instrumentation for pollution control – water pollution from tanneries and other

industries and their control – environment impact assessment for various projects – case studies.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Holman, J.P., Experimental methods for engineers, McGraw-Hill, 1988.

2. Barnery, Intelligent Instrumentation, Prentice Hall of India, 1988.

3. Prebrashensky, V., Measurements and Instrumentation in Heat Engineering, Vol. 1 and 2, MIR Publishers, 1980.

4. Raman, C.S., Sharma, G.R., Mani, V.S.V., Instrumentation Devices and Systems, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 1983.

5. Holman, J.P., Experimental methods for engineers, McGraw-Hill, 1958.






SME5106 OPTIMUM UTILIZATION OF HEAT AND L T P Credits Total Marks

POWER 4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To learn the various types of thermal storage systems and the storage materials.

To develop the ability to model and analyze the sensible and latent heat storage units.

To study the various applications of thermal storage systems.

UNIT 1 CONCEPTS OF COMBINED HEAT AND POWER (CHP) 12 Hrs.

Systems Basic concepts of CHP- The benefits and problems with CHP -Balance of energy demand– Types of prime

movers – Economics– CHP in various sectors.

UNIT 2 ENERGY SAVING METHODOLOGY 12 Hrs.

Pinch Technology–significance– Selection of pinch temperature difference – Stream splitting – Process retrofit –

Installation of heat pumps, heat engines - Grand composite curve.

UNIT 3 WASTE HEAT RECOVERY 12 Hrs.

Insulation – Recuperative heat exchanger – Run–around coil systems – Regenerative heat exchangers – Heat pumps

– Heat pipes –.Waste Heat Recovery -Cogeneration Technology.

UNIT 4 COGENERATION 12 Hrs.

Sources of waste heat, Cogeneration - Principles of Thermodynamics - Combined Cycles-Topping -Bottoming -

Organic Rankine Cycles- Advantages of Cogeneration Technology.

UNIT 5 TECHNO ECONOMICS OF COGENERATION 12 Hrs.

Application & techno economics of Cogeneration- Cogeneration - Performance calculations, Part load

characteristics- financial considerations - Operating and Investments.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Charles H. Butler, Cogeneration, McGraw Hill Book Co., 1984

2. EDUCOGEN – The European Educational tool for cogeneration, Second Edition, 2001

3. Horlock JH, Cogeneration - Heat and Power, Thermodynamics and Economics, Oxford,1987.

4. Institute of Fuel, London, Waste Heat Recovery, Chapman & Hall Publishers, London, 1963.

5. Seagate Subrata, Lee SS EDS, Waste Heat Utilization and Management, Hemisphere, Washington, 1983.

6. De Nevers, Noel., Air Pollution Control Engineering, McGrawHill, New York,1995.






SPR5107

ADVANCED MECHANICAL ENGINEERING L T P Credits Total Marks

4 0 0 4 100

To impart knowledge on mechanics of cracked components of different modes by which these components fail

under static load conditions.


under fatigue load condition.

UNIT 1 ANALYSIS OF STRESS 12 Hrs.

Introduction- Scope of Treatment- Analysis and Design- Conditions of Equilibrium- Definition and Components of

Stress- Internal Force-Resultant and Stress Relations- Stresses on Inclined Sections- Variation of Stress within a Body-

Plane-Stress Transformation-Principal Stresses and Maximum In-Plane Shear Stress- Mohr’s Circle for

Two-Dimensional Stress- Three-Dimensional Stress Transformation- Principal Stresses in Three Dimensions- Normal

and Shear Stresses on an Oblique Plane- Mohr’s Circles in Three Dimensions.

UNIT 2 ENGINEERING MATERIALS AND STRESS-STRAIN RELATION 12 Hrs.

Engineering Materials-orthotropic materials-anisotropic materials Stress-Strain Diagrams-Elastic versus

Plastic Behavior- Hooke’s Law and Poisson’s Ratio- Generalized Hooke’s Law- Hooke’s Law for Orthotropic Materials-

Measurement of Strain: Strain Rosettes- Strain Energy- Strain Energy in Common Structural Members-Components of

Strain Energy, Saint-Venant’s Principle.

UNIT 3 PLASTICITY AND FAILURE CRITERIA 12 Hrs.

Plain Strain Problems- Plain Stress Problems- Comparison of Two-Dimensional Isotropic Problems-Airy’s Stress

Function- Solution of Elasticity Problems-Thermal Stresses-Basic Relations in Polar Coordinates- Stresses Due to

Concentrated Loads- Stress Distribution near Concentrated Loads-Stress Concentration Factors.Failure by Yielding-

Failure by Fracture- Yield and Fracture Criteria- Mohr’s Theory-Coulomb-Mohr Theory- Fracture Mechanics-Fracture

Toughness-Failure Criteria for Metal Fatigue.

UNIT 4 BENDING OF BEAMS 12 Hrs.

Pure Bending of Beams of Symmetrical Cross Section- Pure Bending of Beams of Asymmetrical Cross Section-

Bending of a Cantilever of Narrow Section- Bending of Simply Supported Narrow Beam-Elementary Theory of

Bending-Normal and Shear Stresses-Composite Beams-Shear Center-Statically Indeterminate Systems-Energy

Methods for Deflections-Curved Beams-Elasticity Theory-Curved Beam Formula-Comparison of the Results of Various

Theories-Combined Tangential and Normal Stresses.

UNIT 5 APPLICATIONS OF ENERGY METHODS AND PLASTIC BEHAVIOR OF MATERIALS 12 Hrs.

Work Done in Deformation-Reciprocity Theorem-Castigliano’s Theorem-Crotti-Engesser Theorem-Statically

Indeterminate Systems-Prınciple of Virtual Work-Principle of Minimum Potential Energy-Deflections of Trigonometric

Series-Rayleigh-Ritz Method-Plastic Deformation-Idealized Stress-Strain Diagrams-Instability in Simple

Tension-Plastic Axial Deformation and Residual Stress-Plastic Deflection of Beams-Analysis of Perfectly Plastic

Beams-Stresses in Perfectly Plastic Thick Walled Cylinders.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Ugural, A. C. and S. K. Fenster., Advanced Mechanics of Materials and Applied Elasticity, Prentice Hall,2012.

2. Richard G. Budynas, Advanced Strength and Applied Stress Analysis, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill, 1999.

3. Craig, R.R, Mechanics of Materials, John Wiley & Sons, 2011.

4. Arthur P. Boresi ,Richard J. Schmidt, Advanced Mechanics of Materials, Wiley India Private Limited; Sixth edition,

2009.

5. Srinath, L Advanced mechanics of solids, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2009.






SME5108 ADVANCED MECHANISMS L T P Credits Total Marks

AND SIMULATION 4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

Assimilation of basic concepts to impart use, application and advanced mechanisms and simulation.

Exposure to practical aspects.


Review of fundamentals of kinematics-classifications of mechanisms- components of mechanisms – mobility analysis – formation of one D.O.F. multi loop kinematic chains, Network formula – Gross motion concepts-Basic kinematic structures of serial and parallel robot manipulators-Compliant mechanisms-Equivalent mechanisms.

UNIT 2 KINEMATIC ANALYSIS 12 Hrs.

Position Analysis – Vector loop equations for four bar, slider crank, inverted slider crank, geared five bar and six bar linkages. Analytical methods for velocity and acceleration Analysis– four bar linkage jerk analysis. Plane complex mechanisms- auxiliary point method. Spatial RSSR mechanism-Denavit-Hartenberg Parameters – Forward and inverse kinematics of robot manipulators.

UNIT 3 PATH CURVATURE THEORY, COUPLER CURVE 12 Hrs.

Fixed and moving centrodes, inflection points and inflection circle. Euler Savary equation, graphical constructions – cubic of stationary curvature. Four bar coupler curve-cusp-crunode-coupler driven six-bar mechanisms-straight line mechanisms.

UNIT 4 SYNTHESIS OF FOUR BAR MECHANISMS 12 Hrs.

Type synthesis – Number synthesis – Associated Link age Concept. Dimensional synthesis – function generation, path generation, motion generation. Graphical methods-Pole technique-inversion technique-point position reduction-two, three and four position synthesis of four- bar mechanisms. Analytical methods-Freudenstein’s Equation-Bloch’s Synthesis.

UNIT 5 SYNTHESIS OF COUPLER CURVE BASED MECHANISMS & CAM MECHANISMS 12 Hrs.

Cognate Lingages-parallel motion Linkages. Design of six bar mechanisms-single dwell-double dwell-double stroke. Geared five bar mechanism-multi-dwell. Cam Mechanisms- determination of optimum size of cams. Mechanism defects. Study and use of Mechanism using Simulation Soft-ware packages. Students should design and fabricate a mechanism model as term project.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Robert L.Norton., Design of Machinery,Tata McGraw Hill, 2005.

2. Sandor G.N., and Erdman A.G., Advanced Mechanism Design Analysis and Synthesis, Prentice Hall, 1984.

3. Uicker, J.J., Pennock, G. R. and Shigley, J.E., Theory of Machines and Mechanisms, Oxford University Press, 2005.

4. Amitabha Ghosh and Asok Kumar Mallik, Theory of Mechanism and Machines, EWLP, Delhi, 1999.

5. Kenneth J, Waldron, Gary L. Kinzel, Kinematics,Dynamics and Design of Machinery, John Wiley-sons, 1999.

6. Ramamurti, V., Mechanics of Machines, Narosa, 2005.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max.

Marks : 100


PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 12 marks

m Duration : 3 Hrs.

30 Marks

60 Marks


SME51 09 COMPUTER METHODS IN L T P Credits Total Marks

MECHANICAL DESIGN 4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

• To impart knowledge on computer graphics which are used routinely in diverse areas as science, engineering, medicine,

etc.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER GRAPHICS FUNDAMENTALS 12 Hrs.

Output primitives (points, lines, curves etc.,), 2-D & 3-D transformation (Translation, scaling, rotation) windowing - view

ports – clippingtransformation.

UNIT 2 CURVES AND SURFACES MODELLING 12 Hrs.

Introduction to curves - Analytical curves: line, circle and conics — synthetic curves: Hermite cubic spline-Bezier

curve and B-Spline curve — curve manipulations. Introduction to surfaces - Analytical surfaces: Plane surface, ruled

surface , surface of revolution and tabulated cylinder — synthetic surfaces: Hermite bicubic surface-Bezier surface and

B-Spline surface- surface manipulations.

UNIT 3 NURBS AND SOLID MODELING 12 Hrs.

NURBS- Basics- curves , lines, arcs, circle and bi linear surface. Regularized Boolean set operations - primitive

instancing - sweep representations - boundary representations - constructive solid Geometry - comparison of

representations - user interface for solid modeling.

UNIT 4 VISUAL REALISM 12 Hrs.

Hidden — Line — Surface — solid removal algorithms shading — coloring. Introduction to parametric and

variational geometry based software’s and their principles creation of prismatic and lofted parts using these packages.

UNIT 5 ASSEMBLY OF PARTS AND PRODUCT DATA EXCHANGE 12 Hrs.

Assembly modeling - interferences of positions and orientation - tolerances analysis - mass property calculations -

mechanism simulation. Graphics and computing standards— Open GL Data Exchange standards — IGES, STEP etc—

Communication standards.

Max. 60 Hours


1. William M Neumann and Robert F. Sproul Principles of Computer Graphics, Mc Graw Hill Book Co. Singapore, 1989.

2. Donald Hearn and M. Pauline Baker Computer Graphics, Prentice Hall, Inc., 1992.

3. Ibrahim Zeid Mastering CAD/CAM — McGraw Hill, International Edition, 2007.

4. Foley, Wan Dam, Feiner and Hughes — Computer graphics principles & practices, Pearson Education — 2003.

5. David F. Rogers, James Alan Adams Mathematical elements for computer graphics second edition, Tata McGraw-Hill

edition.






SME51 10 CONCEPTS OF ENGINEERING DESIGN L T P Credits Total Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

Assimilation of basic concepts to impart use, application of concepts in design

Exposure to material processing and design.

UNIT 1 FUNDAMENTALS OF DESIGN 12 Hrs.

Introduction - Product Design Process - Importance of Product Design - The Design Process - Considerations of

a Good Design - Detailed Description of - Design Process - Marketing - Organization for Design - Design Review - the

Problem-Definition - Identifying Customer Needs - Benchmarking - Customer Requirements - Product Design

Specification.

UNIT 2 CUSTOMER CONSIDERATION AND CONCEPT DESIGN 12 Hrs.

The Information Problem - Copyright and Copying - How and Where to Find It - Library Sources of Information -

Government Sources of Information - Information from the Internet - Patent Literature - Codes and Standards - Expert

Systems Creativity and Problem Solving - Creativity Methods - Creative Idea Evaluation - Theory of Inventive Problem

Solving (TRIZ) - Conceptual Decomposition - Generating Design Concepts - Evaluation Methods.

UNIT 3 MODELING, SIMULATION AND MATERIALS IN DESIGN 12 Hrs.

Models in Engineering Design - Mathematical Modeling - Dimensional Analysis - Similitude and Scale Models -

Simulation - Geometric Modeling on the Computer - Finite-Element Analysis - Computer Visualization - Rapid

Prototyping - The materials Selection Process - Sources of Information on Materials Properties - Economics of Materials

- Methods of Materials Selection.

UNIT 4 MATERIAL PROCESSING AND DESIGN 12 Hrs.

Role of Processing in Design - Classification of Manufacturing Processes - Factors Determining Process

Selection - Design for Manufacturability (DFM) - Design for Assembly (DFA) - Early Estimation of Manufacturing Cost -

Computer Methods for DFM and DFA - Design for Castings - Design for Forgings - Design for Sheet-Metal Forming -

Machining - Powder Metallurgy - Welding - Heat Treatment - Plastics Processing- composite material processing.

UNIT 5 ROBUST AND QUALITY DESIGN AND ECONOMIC DECISION MAKING 12 Hrs.

The Concept of Total Quality - Quality Control and Assurance - Quality Improvement - Statistical Process Control

- Taguchi Method - Robust Design - Optimization -Methods - Evaluation Considerations in Optimization - Design

Optimization Categories of Costs - Methods of Developing Cost Estimates - Cost Indexes - Cost-Capacity Factors -

Estimating Plant Cost - Design to Cost - Manufacturing Costs - Value Analysis in Costing - Overhead Costs

-Activity-Based Costing- product Profit Model Learning Curve Cost Models - Life Cycle Costing.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Dieter, George E., Engineering Design - A Materials and Processing Approach, McGraw Hill, International

Editions,Singapore, 2000.

2. Pahl, G, and Beitz, W.,Engineering Design, Springer – Verlag, NY. 1984.

3. Ray, M.S., Elements of Engg. Design, Prentice Hall Inc. 1985.

4. Suh, N.P., The principles of Design, Oxford University Press, NY.1990.

5. Karl T. Ulrich and Steven D. Eppinger Product Design and Development McGraw Hill Edition 2000.






SME51 11 PRINCIPLES OF MATERIALS ENGINEERING L T P Credits Total Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

• To understand the basic concepts of engineering materials, phase transformations and mechanical properties.

UNIT 1 12 Hrs.

Introduction : Solid Engineering Materials- their classification and characteristic properties. Structure of solids: crystal systems/lattices, crystal structure, crystallographic planes and directions, interstitial sites, crystallinity in metals, ceramics, semiconductors and polymers. Microstructures and metallography. amorphous or glassy state. Properties of materials: Definition, units and common tests conducted to evaluate important engineering properties like physical, mechanical, chemical, electrical, magnetic, semi/super-conducting, optical, and thermal properties in engineering materials.

UNIT 2 12 Hrs.

Solidification of pure metal : homogeneous and heterogeneous nucleation processes, cooling curve, concept of supercooling microstructure of pure metals. Defects in solids – point, line, planar and volume. Fundamentals of plastic deformation of metals, deformation by slip and twin, plastic deformation in polycrystalline metals, concept of cold working, preferred orientation. Annealing: Recovery, recrystallization and grain growth, hot working.

UNIT 3 12 Hrs.

Concept of formation of alloys : Types of alloys, solid solutions, factors affecting solid solubility,. Binary phase diagrams: isomorphous, eutectic, peritectic, eutectoid and peritectoid systems, effect of non equilibrium cooling, coring and homogenization. Phase diagrams and kinetics -Iron-carbon diagrams. Microstructure, and properties of different alloys in steel and cast iron, types of cast iron, their microstructures and typical uses.

Heat treatment: T-T-T and C-C-T diagrams, concept of heat treatments of steel annealing, normalizing, hardening and tempering; Effect of common alloying elements in steel, Concept of hardenability, and strengthening mechanisms Common alloy steels, stainless steel, tool steel, high speed steel, high strength low alloy steel, microalloyed steel, specifications of steels. Physical metallurgy of common non-ferrous alloys: Cu-,Al- and Ni- based alloys. Microstructures and heat treatment of common alloys of these systems.

UNIT 4 12 Hrs.

Phase transformations : Types of phase changes, F i c k s laws of diffusion in solids, the Kirkendall effect, Nucleation and growth, solidification, pearlitic transformations, martensitic transformations – kinetics of transformation, precipitation and age hardening.

UNIT 5 12 Hrs.

Mechanical properties : Factors affecting mechanical properties, mechanical tests, tensile, hardness, impact, creep and fatigue, Plastic deformation by slip, shear strength, work hardening and recovery, fracture, Griffith's theory, slip and twinning, creep resistant materials diffusion – F i c k s law.

Max. 60 Hours

TET / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Norton, F.H Elements of Ceramics, Addison-Wesley Press (1974)

2. Barsoum, M.W. Fundamentals of Ceramics, McGraw-Hill (2003)

3. Smallman R. E., „Modern Physical Metallurgy, 4th Edition, Butterworths, 1985

4. Avner, S. H., “Introduction to Physical Metallurgy”, second edition, McGraw Hill, 1985. 5. Raghavan, V., “Physical Metallurgy”, Prentice Hall of India, 1985.






SME51 12 METALLURGICAL PROCESSING L T P Credits Total Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

• To understand the basic concepts of manufacturing process, welding process and powder metallurgical process.

UNIT 1 12 Hrs. Basic manufacturing processes : Fundamental analysis of Manufacturing processes, casting, casting processes, forging, methods of forging, extrusion, rolling, spinning, turning, planning and shaping, milling, grinding.

UNIT 2 12 Hrs.

Surface treatment processes : Necessity for surface modification, surface cladding, surface alloying, hard facing, shock hardening, conventional methods, carburising, nitriding, cyaniding, advantages of laser surface treatment over conventional methods, typical laser variables used in surface alloying, laser cladding, experimental set up.

UNIT 3 12 Hrs.

Welding processes : Various processes of welding, fusion welding, pressure welding, oxyacetelene welding, resistance welding, spot welding, thermit welding, projection welding, seam welding, butt welding, thermal effects of welding, effects on grain size and microstructure, internal stresses effect, corrosion effect, high energy beam welding, laser beam and electron beam welding, key hole effect.

UNIT 4 12 Hrs.

Mechanical working of metals : Hot working, cold working, normalising, full annealing, tempering, theory of tempering, effect of tempering temperature on mechanical properties of carbon steels, different tempering process, deformation of metals, elastic deformation, plastic deformation, slip, twinning.

UNIT 5 12 Hrs.

Powder metallurgical process : Production of powders, powder mixing, compacting, types of presses, sintering, soaking, finishing process, limitations and advantages of powder metallurgy, applications, production of cemented carbide cutting tools, self lubricating bearings, magnets, cermets, ultrasonic ceramic transducers.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Rajan, T.V. Sharma, C.P. and Sharma, A. Heat treatment -Principles and Techniques. Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi, 1995.

2. Muralidhara, M.K.. Materials Science and Processes. Dhanpat Rai Publishing Co., New Delhi, 1998.

3. Rykalin, Uglov A, Kokona, A Laser and Electron beam material processing hand book, MIR Publishers, 1987.

4. Gupta, R.B.. Materials Science and Processes. Satya Prakashan, New Delhi, 1995.





SME51 13 FUNDAMENTALS OF NANOSCIENCE AND L T P Credits Total Marks

NANOTECHNOLOGY 4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

• To understand the basic concepts of nano synthesis techniques and processing methods.

UNIT 1 12 Hrs. Introduction to nanotechnology basics : Definition, History of nanotechnology. Nanotechnology in relation to

other branches of science. Structure of solids crystalline and non-crystalline. Types of common materials and advanced materials inorganics, organics, biological. Types of nanomaterials depending upon their properties, semiconductors, superconductors, superionic, magnetic, optic, opto-electronics, spintronics, lasers, photonics, ceramics, bioceramics, biomedical, biosensors, bioimagers, photocatalysts, quantum dots.

UNIT 2 12 Hrs.

Size effect of materials on properties. Quantization effect on the properties of materials with examples. Nanocomposites and their applications in modern technology. Nanotubes carbon nanotubes and other nanotubes. Nanomaterials natural and synthetic. Nanocomposites and Nanohybrid materials.

UNIT 3 12 Hrs.

Nanomaterials synthesis techniques nanoengineering of materials : Bottom up and Top down routes. Solution, Melt and Gas Processing of nanomaterials. Nature inspired processes. Nanotechnology in modern technology in relation to electronic, biological, consumer and domestic applications. Applied nanobiotechnology and nanobiomedical science drug delivery, drug targeting, biosensors, bioimaging, neutron capture therapy.

UNIT 4 12 Hrs. Silicon Processing methods : Clean room classification, Cleaning /Etching, Oxidation, Getttering, Doping, Epitaxy

Top down approach to nanolithography, Immersion lithography, UV photolithography, Phase lithography, Including Plasma X-ray sources, E-Beam Lithography, Principle of dip pen lithography, Focused Ion beams, Laser micro/nano patterning.

UNIT 5 12 Hrs.

Semiconductor device roadmap, Silicon insultaor technology, Gate of high K dielectrics, Thermal manufacturing, Beyond CMOS. Applications of nanoparticles, quantum dots, nanotubes and nanowires for nanodevice fabrication, Single electron transistors, coulomb blockade effects in ultra-small metallic tunnel junctions, nanoparticles based solar cells and quantum dots based white LEDs, CNT based transistors.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Bharath Bhusan, Springer Handbook of Nanotechnology, 3rd edition, Springer-Verlag (2009)

2. CNR Rao and Cheetham, T. Chemistry of Nanomaterials : Synthesis, Properties and Applications, Wiley & Sons (2005)

3. Hari Singh Nalwa, Encyclopedia of Nanotechnology, American Scientific Publishers (2004) 4. Byrappa, K. and Yoshimura, M. Handbook of Hydrothermal Technology, 2nd edition, Elsevier (2012)

5. Byrappa, K. and Adschiri, T. Hydrothermal Technology for Nanotechnology, Progress in Crystal Growth and Characteriation of Materials, Volume 53 (2007) pp.117-166.

6. Byrappa, K. and Yoshimura, M. (Editors): Special Edition of Journal of Materials Science, Volume 41, No.6 (2006).

7. Byrappa, K. and Adschiri, T. (Editors), Special Edition of Journal of Materials Science, Volume 43, No.7 (2008).

8. Charles P. Poole Jr. and Franks J. Qwens, Introduction to Nanotechnology, Wiley & sons (2003).






SME51 14 POLYMERS AND COMPOSITE MATERIALS L T P Credits Total Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

• To understand the basic concepts of polymers, composites and their properties.

UNIT 1 12 Hrs.

Introduction to Polymers : Classification of polymers, copolymers, tacticity, geometric isomerism, molecular weight distribution and

averages, Measurement of molecular weight, synthesis of polymers, step growth polymerization, chain growth polymerization, polymerisation

techniques.

UNIT 2 12 Hrs.

Properties of Polymers : Polymer conformation and chain dimensions, Freely jointed chains, Gaussian model, introduction to rubber

elasticity amorphous state, glass transition temperature, the crystalline state, ordering of polymer chains, crystalline melting temperature, techniques

to determine crystallinity, Mechanical properties, Introduction to viscoelasticity, dynamic mechanical analysis, mechanical models of viscoelastic

behavior, Boltzmann superposition principle.

UNIT 3 12 Hrs.

Polymer Processing, Rheology and Applications : Basic processing operations, extrusion, molding, calendaring, coating, Introduction to

polymer rheology, non-Newtonian flow, analysis of simple flows, rheometry, capillary rheometer, Couette rheometer, cone and plate

rheomete-applications-conducting, polymers-biopolymers, liquid crystal polymers-photonic, polymers-high temperature polymers.

UNIT 4 12 Hrs.

Introduction to Composites : Types of composite materials, the concept of load transfer, matrix materials, polymers, metals and ceramics,

fibers, glass, boron, carbon, organic and metallic fibers-fiber packing arrangements, particle reinforced composites, fibre reinforced composites,

interface region bonding mechanisms, mechanical behavior of composites.

UNIT 5 12 Hrs.

Fabrication of Composites : Polymer matrix composites, liquid resin impregnation routes, pressurized consolidation of resin pre-pregs,

consolidation of resin moulding compounds, injection moulding of thermoplastics, hot press moulding of thermoplastics, metal composites, squeeze

infiltration, stir casting, spray deposition, powder blending and consolidation, diffusion bonding of foils, physical vapour deposition, ceramic

composites, powder based routes, reactive processing, layered ceramic composites, carbon/carbon composites.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Joel R.Fried, Polymer Science and Technology, Phi Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2009.

2. Gowarikar, V .R . Viswanathan, N.V. & Sreedhar, J. Polymer Science, New Age International, 2011.

3. Crawford, R.J.C. Plastics Engineering, Butterworth-Heinemann, 1998.

4. Hull, D. & Clyne, T.W. An Introduction to Composite Materials, Cambridge University Press, 2008.

5. Chawla, K.K. Composite Materials: Science and Engineering, Springer -Verlag, New York, 2010.

6. Mallick, P.K. Fiber-Reinforced Composites: Materials, Manufacturing and Design, CRC Press, Boca Raton.






SME51 15 MATERIALS CHARACTERIZATION L T P Credits Total Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

• To understand the basic concepts of characterization of materials and various techniques on thermal, optical and electron imaging techniques.

UNIT 1 12 Hrs.

Crystal structure and Crystallography, X-ray diffraction : reciprocal lattice, Powder, rotating crystal and Laue methods, accurate lattice parameter measurement, phase identification, crystal structure analysis, qualitative and quantitative phase analysis – indexing - ICDD powder diffraction file – uses. The Rietveld method - Principles and fundamentals - peak shapes – profile fitting - structure refinement: procedures adopted – R factors – auto indexing - structure determination from powder data, residual stress measurement, texture.

UNIT 2 12 Hrs.

Crystal structure and Crystallography, X-ray diffraction : reciprocal lattice, Powder, rotating crystal and Laue methods, accurate lattice parameter measurement, phase identification, crystal structure analysis, qualitative and quantitative phase analysis – indexing - ICDD powder diffraction file – uses. The Rietveld method - Principles and fundamentals - peak shapes – profile fitting - structure refinement: procedures adopted – R factors – auto indexing - structure determination from powder data, residual stress measurement, texture.

UNIT 3 12 Hrs. Thermal analysis ; TGA, DTA, DSC, dilatometry, (Thermal expansion), Instrumentation, Principles and applications.

UNIT 4 12 Hrs. Particle size analysis : surface area measurement, DC polarization, AC impedance and four probe measurements, conductivity measurements, particle size analysis; zeta potential.

UNIT 5 12 Hrs.

Raman spectroscopy : UV-Visible spectroscopy, Photoluminescence, Positron Annihilation Lifetime Spectroscopy, Auger spectroscopy and X-ray photoelectron spectroscopy. Mechanical properties, Tensile and Fatigue strength, Fracture toughness, Microhardness, and Nanoindentation measurements.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Smallman R. E., “Modern Physical Metallurgy”, 4th Edition, Butterworths, 1985

2. Philips V. A., “Modern Metallographic Techniques and their Applications”, Wiley Interscience, 1971

3. Sam Zhang, Lin Li and Ashok Kumar, Materials Characterization Techniques, CRC Press, (2008) 4. Cullity B. D., “Elements of X-ray Diffraction”, 4th Edition, Addison Wiley, 1978

5. Loretto M. H., “Electron Beam Analysis of Materials”, Chapman and Hall, 1984

6. Yang Leng, Materials Characterization: Introduction to Microscopic and Spectroscopic Methods, Wiley & Sons (2008).

7. Elton N. Kaufmann, Characterization of Materials, Vol.1, Wiley & Sons (2003).

8. Laudise, R.A. Growth of Single Crystals, Prentice Hall, (1973).

9. Dhanaraj, G., Byrappa, K, Prasad V. and Dudley, M. (Eds.), Springer Handbook of Crystal Growth , Springer-Verlag (2010).

10. Peter E.J. Flewitt and Wild, R.K., Physical Methods of Materials Characterization, 2nd Edition, Taylor & Francis (2003).





SME51 16 THERMODYNAMICS OF MATERIALS L T P Credits Total Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To study kinetic theory, gas laws, laws of thermodynamics ,Statistical Thermodynamics and study of materials

UNIT 1 12 Hrs. Kinetic Theory and Gas Laws: Kinetic Theory of Matter, Different States of Matter, Concept of Ideal or Perfect Gas, Kinetic Theory of Gases, Expression for the Pressure of a Gas, Kinetic interpretation of Temperature.

UNIT 2 12 Hrs.

Equation of State : Derivation of Gas Equation, Derivation of Gas Laws, Avogadro's Hypothesis, Graham's Law of Diffusion of Gases, Degree of Freedom & Maxwell's Law of Equi-partition of Energy, Mean Free Path, Van-der Waals Equation of State, Critical Constants, Corresponding States, Critical Coefficient.

UNIT 3 12 Hrs.

Laws of Thermodynamics : Thermal Equilibrium Concept of Temperature (Zeroth Law of Thermodynamics), Concept of Heat and work, Comparison of Heat and Work - First Law of Thermodynamics, Isothermal Process, Adiabatic Process, Isobaric Process, Isochoric Process, Second Law of Thermodynamics, Entropy, Third Law of Thermodynamics.

UNIT 4 12 Hrs.

Statistical Thermodynamics : Statistical Mechanics, Statistical Equilibrium, Statistical definition of entropy, Gibbs Paradox-Probability Theorems, Statistical Thermodynamics, Maxwell-Boltzmann Distribution Law Maxwell-Boltzmann Distribution & Ideal Gas, Quantum Statistics, Phase Space, Fermi-Dirac Distribution Law, Electron Gas, Bose-Einstein Distribution Law, Photon Gas, Theories of simple liquids-Monte-Carlo Molecular dynamics simulations-Reaction dynamics from microscopic viewpoint.

UNIT 5 12 Hrs.

Applications of Statistical Mechanics, Plancks Radi ation law- Stefan-Boltzmann law, Einstein model of a solid, Bose condensation, Classical partition function and classical ideal gas, Equipartition theorem, Semiconductor statistics, Statistical equilibrium of electrons in semiconductors.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Richard E. Sonntag and Claus Borgnakke, Introduction to Engineering Thermodynamics, Wiley; 2 edition (March 3, 2006), ISBN-10: 0471737593.

2. Ken A. Dill and Sarina Bromberg, Molecular Driving Forces: Statistical Thermodynamics in Chemistry and Biology Garland Science. (Taylor & Francis Group), 2003.

3. Gupta, M.C.. Statistical Thermodynamics. Wiley Eastern Ltd., New Delhi, 1993

4. Engel, T. and P. Reid. Thermodynamics, Statistical Thermodynamics & Kinetics, Pearson Education , Inc. 2006.

5. Callen, H.B.. Thermodynamics. John Wiley and Sons, New York 1960.

6. Goldstein, H, Poole, C.P. and Safko, J.. Classical Mechanics. Pearson Education, Inc. 2011.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100



m Duration : 3 Hrs.

30 Marks

70 Marks

SPR5201

DESGIN AND OPTIMIZATION OF THERMAL SYSTEM L T P Credits Total Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To learn basic principles underlying piping, pumping, heat exchangers; modeling and optimization in design of thermal systems.

To develop representational modes of real processes and systems.

To develop concept of design optimization of thermal systems.

UNIT 1 DESIGN CONCEPTS 12 Hrs. Design Principles, Workable Systems, Optimal Systems, Matching of System Components, Economic Analysis, Depreciation, Gradient Present Worth factor.

UNIT 2 MATHEMATICAL MODELLING AND SYSTEM SIMULATION 12 Hrs.

Equation Fitting, Nomography, Empirical Equation, Regression Analysis, Different Modes of Mathematical Models, Selection, and Computer Programmes for Models. System simulation - Application of successive method and Newton Raphson Method to Energy Systems.

UNIT 3 MODELLING THERMAL EQUIPMENTS 12 Hrs. Modelling Heat Exchangers, Evaporators, Condensers, Compressors, Pumps, Turbo machines, Distillation equipment, Absorber, generator, GAX, Simulation Studies, Information Flow Diagram, Solution Procedures

UNIT 4 SYSTEMS OPTIMIZATION 12 Hrs.

Mathematical Representation for Optimization Problems in Energy Systems- Calculus Method - Dynamic programming – Search methods, Applications of various search methods to Energy Systems - Waste Heat Recovery System - design of energy recovery systems.

UNIT 5 COST ANALYSIS AND FORECASTING TECHNIQUES 12 Hrs. Cost analysis by present worth-annual cost-Evaluating potential Investments-Forecasting Techniques-Economic Factors in Energy Systems-Examples- Genetic Algorithms – using MATLAB.

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Stoecker W. F., Design of Thermal Systems, McGraw Hill Edition, 1989.

2. Jaluria, Y., Design and Optimisation of Thermal Systems, McGraw-Hill, 1998.

3. Bejan A., George Tsatsaronis , Michael J. Moran , Thermal Design and Optimization, Wiley, 1996.

4. Kapur J. N., Mathematical Modelling , Wiley Eastern Ltd , New York , 1989.

5. Yogesh Jaluria , Design and Optimization of Thermal Systems , CRC Press , 2007. 6. Rao S. S., Engineering Optimization Theory and Practice, New Age Publishers, 2000.





SME5202 SURFACE ENGINEERING L T P Credits Total Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

• To understand the basic concepts of surface engineering processes and various coating treatments.

UNIT 1 12 Hrs.

High vacuum production and measurement : Mechanical pumps, Diffusion pump, turbomolecular pumps, production of ultra high vacuum, thin film vacuum coating unit, substrate cleaning, Thermocouple gaugespirani, Penning Hot ionization gauges, Capacitance gauges, Basic principles.

UNIT 2 12 Hrs.

Surface engineering : classification, Physical methods, thermal evaporation, vapour sources, Wire, crucible and electron beam gun, sputtering mechanism and DC&RF magnetron methods, Pulsed laser deposition (PLD),CVD,), Chemical methods, chemical vapour deposition (CVD)and chemical solution deposition techniques, Plasma enhanced CVD, spray pyrolysis, spin coating. Thickness measurement by Multiple beam interference, quartz crystal, ellipsometric, stylus techniques. Calowear. Growth and structure of films, General features, Nucleation theories, Post-nucleation growth, Thin film structures, Structural defects.

UNIT 3 12 Hrs. Biological synthesis ; Electrochemistry, Multi-energy processing, Mechano-Chemical, Sono-Chemical, Photo-Chemical and Bio-Chemical.

UNIT 4 12 Hrs.

Surface treatment processes : Necessity for surface modification surface cladding, surface alloying, hard facing, shock hardening, conventional methods, carburizing, nitriding, cyaniding, advantages of laser surface treatment over conventional methods, typical laser variables used in surface alloying, laser cladding experimental set up.

UNIT 5 12 Hrs.

Applications of thin films and Coatings ; Optical - reflection and anti-reflection coatings, interference filters, thin film solar cells, electrophotography, Electrical and dielectric behaviour of thin films, components, thin film diode and transistor, strain gauges and gas sensors, Anisotropy in magnetic films, domains in films, computer memories, superconducting thin films, SQUID, mechanical properties, testing methods, adhesion, surface and tribological coatings.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Ohring, M.. The Materials Science of Thin Films. Academic Press, 2001.

2. Smith, D. L.. Thin-Film Deposition: Principles and Practice. McGraw-Hill, 1995.

3. Chopra, K.L. Thin Film Phenomena, McGraw-Hill, 1969.

4. Chopra, K.L. and Kaur, I.J. Thin Film Device Applications, Plenum Press, London, 1983.

5. Maissel, L.I. and Glang, R. (Eds.), Handbook of Thin film Technology, McGraw- Hill, 1970.

6. Berry, R.W. Hall, P.M. and Harris, M.T. Thin Film Technology, Von Nostrand,1968.

7. George Hass, Physics of Thin Films: Volumes 1 -12, Academic Press.


Marks : 100



Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

30 Marks

70 Marks

SPR5101

THEORY OF AERODYNAMICS L T P Credits Total Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

• To understand the behaviour of airflow over bodies with particular emphasis on airfoil sections in the incompressible flow

regime.

UNIT1 INTRODUCTION TO AERODYNAMICS 12 Hrs.

Various types of airplanes, Continuity and Momentum equations, Point source and sink, doublet, Free and Forced

Vortex, Uniform parallel flow, combination of basic flows, Pressure and Velocity distributions on bodies with and without

circulation in ideal and real fluid flows, Magnus effect

UNIT 2 INCOMPRESSIBLE FLOW THEORY 12 Hrs.

Conformal Transformation, Kutta condition, Thin aerofoil Theory and its applications. Vortex line, Horse shoe vortex, Biot -

Savart law, lifting line theory and its applications.

UNIT 3 NON-LINEAR LIFTING LINE THEORY 12 Hrs.

2 D Panel method Source and vortex panels, Numerical approach to lifting line theory. Vortex Lattice method.

UNIT 4 AIRFOILS, WINGS AND AIRPLANE CONFIGURATION IN HIGH SPEED FLOWS 12 Hrs.

shockwaves and expansion waves, Potential equation for compressible flow, small perturbation theory, Prandtl-Glauert

Rule, Linearised supersonic flow theory, Critical Mach number, Iift and Drag divergence Mach number, Shock stall, super critical

airfoils, Transonic area rule, supersonic airfoils, wave drag.

UNIT 5 VISCOUS FLOW AND FLOW MEASUREMENTS 12 Hrs.

Types of subsonic and supersonic wind tunnels – Flow visualization processes – Optical methods Measurement of force

and moments in wind tunnels.

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT/REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Anderson J.D. Jr., Fundamentals of Aerodynamics, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi.. 2007

2. Rathakrishnan.E., Gas Dynamics, Prentice Hall of India, 1995.

3. Karamcheti K., Principles of Ideal-Fluid Aerodynamics, John Wiley & Sons Inc.,1996

4. Bertin J.J., Aerodynamics for Engineers, 4th Ed. Prentice-Hall Inc.,2002

5. Kuethe A. M. and Chow C.-Y., Foundations of Aerodynamics, John Wiley & Sons Inc. 1986

6. Kundu P.K. & Cohen I.M., Fluid Mechanics, Elsevier Inc. 2008

7. Katz J. & Plotkin A., Low-Speed Aerodynamics, Cambridge University Press. 2001

8. Cebeci T. An Engineering Approach to the Calculation of Aerodynamic Flows, Horizons Publishing Inc. 1999





SPR5102

ADVANCED AIRCRAFT STRUCTURES L T P Credits Total Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

• To study different types of beams and columns subjected to various types of loading and support conditions with

particular emphasis on aircraft structural components.

UNIT 1 BENDING OF BEAMS 12 Hrs.

Elementary theory of bending - Introduction to semi-monocoque structures - Bredt-Batho theory - Stresses in

beams of symmetrical and unsymmetrical sections -Box beams – General formula for bending stresses-principal axes

method – Neutral axis method.

UNIT 2 SHEAR FLOW IN OPEN SECTIONS 12 Hrs.

Shear stresses in beams – Shear flow in stiffened panels - Shear flow in thin walled open tubes – Shear centre – Shear

flow in open sections with stiffeners.

UNIT 3 SHEAR FLOW IN CLOSED SECTIONS 12 Hrs.

Shear flow in closed sections with stiffeners– Angle of twist - Shear flow in two flange and three flange box beams

– Shear centre - Shear flow in thin walled closed tubes - Tensional óieaò flow in multi cell tubes - Flexural shear flow in

multi cell stiffened structures.

UNIT 4 STABILITY PROBLEMS 12 Hrs.

Stability problems of thin walled structures– Buckling of sheets under compression, shear, bending and combined

loads - Crippling stresses by Needham’s and Gerard’s methods–Sheet stiffener panels-Effective width, Inter rivet and

sheet wrinkling failures-Tension field web beams(Wagner’s).

UNIT 5 ANALYSIS OF AIRCRAFT STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS 12 Hrs.

Loads on Wings – Schrenk’s curve - Shear force, bending moment and torque distribution along the span of the

Wing. Loads on fuselage - Shear and bending moment distribution along the length of the fuselage. Analysis of rings

and frames.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Bruhn E.F., “Analysis and Design of Flight Vehicle Structures”, Tristate Offset Co., 1980.

2. Megson, T.M.G; Aircraft Structures for Engineering Students, Edward Arnold, 1995.

3. Peery, D.J. and Azar, J.J., Aircraft Structures, 2nd Edition, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1993.

4. Stephen P. Tinnoshenko & S.woinowsky Krieger, Theory of Plates and Shells, 2nd Edition, McGraw-Hill,

Singapore, 1990.

5. Rivello, R.M., Theory and Analysis of Flight structures, McGraw-Hill, N.Y., 1993






SAE5103 AEROSPACE PROPULSION L T P Credits Total Marks

3 1 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

• To understand the principles of operation and design of aircraft and spacecraft power plants and their components.

UNIT 1 ELEMENTS OF AIRCRAFT PROPULSION 12 Hrs.

Classification of power plants based on methods of aircraft propulsion – Propulsive efficiency – Specific fuel consumption -

Thrust and power- Factors affecting thrust and power- Illustration of working of Gas turbine engine - Characteristics of

turboprop, turbofan and turbojet , Ram jet, Scram jet – Methods of Thrust augmentation.

UNIT 2 PROPELLER THEORY 12 Hrs.

Momentum / actuator disc theory, Blade element theory, combined blade element and momentum theory, vortex theory, rotor

in hover, rotor model with cylindrical wake and constant circulation along blade, free wake model, Constant chord and ideal twist

rotors, Lateral flapping, Coriolis forces, reaction torque, compressibility effects, Ground effect.

UNIT 3 INLETS, NOZZLES AND COMBUSTION CHAMBERS 12 Hrs.

Subsonic and supersonic inlets – Relation between minimum area ratio and external deceleration ratio – Starting problem

in supersonic inlets –Modes of inlet operation, jet nozzle – Efficiencies – Over expanded, under and optimum expansion in nozzles –

Thrust reversal. Classification of Combustion chambers - Combustion chamber performance – Flame tube cooling – Flame

stabilization.

UNIT 4 COMPRESSORS AND TURBINES 12 Hrs.

Centrifugal compressor – Work done and pressure rise – Velocity diagrams – Elementary theory of axial flow compressor –

degree of reaction – Impulse and reaction gas turbines – Velocity triangles – Choice of blade profile, pitch and chord.

UNIT5 ROCKET PROPULSION 12 Hrs.

Introduction to rocket propulsion – Reaction principle – Thrust equation – Classification of rockets based on propellants

used – solid, liquid and hybrid – Comparison of these engines with special reference to rocket performance

Thrust control in liquid rockets..

Max. 60 Hours


Hill,P.G. and Peterson, C.R. Mechanics and Thermodynamics of Propulsion, Addison – Wesley Longman Inc. 1999

Cohen, H. Rogers, G.F.C. and Saravanamuttoo,H.I.H, Gas Turbine Theory, Longman,1989.

Oates G.C., “Aerothermodynamics of Aircraft Engine Components”, AIAA Education Series, 1985.

Sutton G.P., “Rocket Propulsion Elements”, John Wiley & Sons Inc., New York, 5th Edition, 1986.

Gill W.P., H.J.Smith & J.E. Ziurys, “Fundamentals of Internal Combustion Engines as applied to Reciprocating, Gas turbine &

Jet Propulsion Power Plants”, Oxford & IBH Publishing Co., 1980.





1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

.


SAE5104 STRUCTURAL DYNAMICS L T P Credits Total Marks

3 1 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

• To study the dynamic behaviour of different aircraft components and the interaction among the aerodynamic, elastic and

inertia forces

UNIT 1 SINGLE DEGREE OF FREEDOM SYSTEMS 12 Hrs.

Free and forced vibrations of damped and undammed systems; Simple harmonic excitation; steady state response-tensional

vibrations.

UNIT 2 TWO DEGREES OF FREEDOM SYSTEMS 12 Hrs.

Free and forced vibration of spring-mass-damper systems; tensional vibrations; modal analysis of undammed and

damped systemsnumerical methods: Matrix iteration, Holz er’s method, Dunkerley’s lower and Rayleigh’s upper bound

approximationsDynamic vibration absorbers

UNIT 3 VIBRATION OF MULTI-DEGREE OF REEDOM AND CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 12 Hrs.

Vibrating string; Longitudinal and torsional vibration of rods; Free and forced vibration of beams; Properties of vibrating

systems: Flexibility and stiffness influence coefficients; Reciprocity theorem; Eigenvalue analysis; Orthogonality of eigenvectors;

Modal matrix

UNIT 4 EXPERIMENTAL METHODS IN VIBRATION ANALYSIS 12 Hrs.

Vibration instruments: exciters, transducers, analysers, measurement devices: vibrometers, velocity meters and

accelerometers; Signal analysis techniques: time domain analysis, frequency domain analysis, amplitude and power spectra,

coherence, auto and cross correlations, amplitude and frequency modulations; Tests for free and forced vibrations

UNIT 5 CASE STUDIES 12 Hrs.

Vehicle dynamics: introduction to nonlinear and random vibrations, vehicle subjected to random vibrations (for example an

uneven road); Fluid-structure interaction problems: vibration of suspension bridges

Max. 60 Hours


1. Thompson,W.T., “Theory of vibrations with applications”, Pretice Hall of India,1 972

2. Srinivasan.P., “Mechanical Vibration Analysis”,Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., 1982

3. Grover,”Mechanical Vibrations” nem Chad& Bros,1996 4. Singiresu S.Rao., “ Mechanical Vibrations” Fourth edition,2014,Dorling Kindersley(India) Pvt Ltd, 2003..

5. Den Hartog , “ Mechanical Vibrations” , Mc Graw Hill Publication, 1956.

6. William, W. Seto, “ Mechanical vibrations”, Schaum Publishing Company, 1964.






SAE51 05 EXPERIMENTAL TECHNIQUES FOR L T P Credits Total Marks

AERONAUTICAL APPLICATIONS 4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

• To gain knowledge about various experimental techniques used in Aerodynamics and aircraft structural field.

UNIT 1 BASIC MEASUREMENTS IN FLUID MECHANICS 12 Hrs.

Objective of experimental studies – Fluid mechanics measurements – Properties of fluids – Measuring instruments – Performance

terms associated with measurement systems – Direct measurements - Analogue methods – Flow visualization –Components of measuring

systems – Importance of model studies - Experiments on Taylor-Proudman theorem and Ekman layer – Measurements in boundary layers.

UNIT 2 WIND TUNNEL MEASEUREMENTS 12 Hrs.

Characteristic features, operation and performance of low speed, transonic, supersonic and special tunnels - Power losses in a wind

tunnel – Instrumentation and calibration of wind tunnels – Turbulence- Wind tunnel balance – Principle and application and uses – Balance

calibration.

UNIT 3 FLOW VISUALIZATION AND ANALOGUE METHODS 12 Hrs.

Visualization techniques – S m o k e tunnel – Hele-Shaw apparatus - Interferometer – Fringe-Displacement method – Shadowgraph -

Schlieren system – Background Oriented Schliren (BOS) System - Hydraulic analogy - Hydraulic jumps – Electrolytic tank- Pitot-Static tube

characteristics - Velocity measurements - Hot-wire anemometry – Constant current and Constant temperature Hot-Wire an emom et er –

Hot-film anemometry – Laser Doppler Velocimetry (LDV) – Particle Image Velocimetry (PIV) – Pressure Sensitive Paints - Pressure

measurement techniques - Pressure transducers Temperature

UNIT 4 PHOTOELASTICITY 12 Hrs.

. Fringe sharpening and Fringe multiplication techniques-Compensation and separation techniques-Calibration methods –Photo elastic

materials. Introduction to three dimensional photo elasticity. Moire fringes – Laser holography – Grid methods-Stress coat. Measurements.Two

dimensional photo elasticity-Concepts of photo elastic effects. Photo elastic materials-Stress optic law-Plane polariscope–Circular

polariscope-Transmission and Reflection type-Effect of stressed model in Plane and Circular polariscope. Interpretation of fringe pattern Isoclinic’s

and Isochromatics.-Fringe sharpening and Fringe multiplication techniques-Compensation and separation techniques-Introduction to three

dimensional photo elasticity.

UNIT 5 NON DESTRUCTIVE TECHNIQUES & DATA ACQUISITION 12 Hrs.

Radiography-Ultrasonics-Magnetic particle inspection-Fluorescent penetrant technique-Eddy current testing-Acoustic emission

technique. Data acquisition and processing – Signal conditioning - Estimation of measurement errors – Uncertainty calculation - Uses of

uncertainty analysis

Max. 60 Hours


1. Rathakrishnan, E., “Instrumentation, Measurements, and Experiments in Fluids,” CRC Press.

2. Dally X J.W. And Riley M.F., “Experimental Stress Analysis”, McGraw-Hill Book Co., New York, 1988.


Marks : 100

PART A : 6 Questions of 5 Marks each uniformly distributed among all units – No Choice PART B : 2

Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 14 Marks

m Duration : 3 Hrs. 30

Marks 70

Marks


SAE5106 FLIGHT MECHANICS L T P Credits Total Marks

3 1 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To understand the behaviour of aircraft at various flight conditions.

To understand aircraft’s stability and control at various flight operations and manuvering conditions. UNIT 1

PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT 12 Hrs.

Physical properties and structure of the atmosphere, International Standard Atmosphere, Temperature, pressure and

altitude relationship, Measurement of speed – True, Indicated and Equivalent air speed, Streamlined and bluff bodies, Various

Types of drag in airplanes, Drag polar, Methods of drag reduction of airplanes.

UNIT 2 AIRCRAFT PERFORMANCE IN LEVEL, CLIMBING AND GLIDING FLIGHT 12 Hrs.

Straight and level flight, Thrust required and available, Power required and available, Effect of altitude on thrust and power,

Conditions for minimum drag and minimum power required, Gliding and Climbing flight, Range and Endurance

UNIT 3 ACCELERATING FLIGHT 12 Hrs.

Take off and landing performance, Turning performance, horizontal and vertical turn, Pull up and pull down, maximum turn

rate, V-n diagram

UNIT 4 LONGITUDINAL STABILITY AND CONTROL 12 Hrs.

Degrees of freedom of a system, static and dynamic stability, static longitudinal stability, Contribution of individual

components, neutral point, static margin, Hinge moment, Elevator control effectiveness, Power effects, elevator angle to trim,

elevator angle per g, manoeuvre point, stick force gradient, aerodynamic balancing, Aircraft equations of motion, stability

derivatives, stability quartic, Phugoid motion

UNIT 5 LATERAL, DIRECTIONAL STABILITY AND CONTROL 12 Hrs.

Yaw and side slip, Dihedral effect, contribution of various components, lateral control, aileron control power, strip theory,

aileron reversal, weather cock stability, directional control, rudder requirements, dorsal fin, One engine inoperative condition,

Dutch roll, spiral and directional divergence, autorotation and spin.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Houghton, E.L., and Caruthers, N.B., Aerodynamics for engineering students, Edward Arnold Publishers, 1988.

2. Perkins C.D., & Hage, R.E. Airplane performance, stability and control, Wiley Toppan, 1974.

3. Kuethe, A.M., and Chow, C.Y., Foundations of Aerodynamics, John Wiley & Sons, 1982.

4. Clancey,L.J. Aerodynamics, Pitman, 1986.

5. Babister, A.W. Aircraft stability and response, Pergamon Press, 1980.

6. Nelson, R.C. Flight Stability & Automatic Control, McGraw-Hill, 1989.

7. McCormic, B.W., Aerodynamics, Aeronautics & Flight Mechanics John Wiley, 1995.

.






SAE51 07 FINITE ELEMENT METHODS L T P Credits Total Marks

FOR AIRCRAFT STRUCTURES 3 1 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

• To understand various numerical techniques to do various structural and thermal analysis of various aircraft components at

various end conditions.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS 12 Hrs

Objective of the Course, Basic Steps in FEM Formulation, General Applicability of the Method; Variation Functional, Ritz

Method. Variation FEM : Derivation of Elemental Equations, Assembly, Imposition of Boundary Conditions, Solution of the

Equations

UNIT 2 FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS OF ONE DIMENSIONAL PROBLEMS 12 Hrs.

1 -D Elements- spring, Bar , truss, beam and Frame elements, Basis Functions and Shape Functions, Convergence

Criteria, h and p Approximations. Natural Coordinates, Numerical Integration, Gauss Elimination based Solvers. Computer

implementation: Pre-processor, Processor, Post-processor. Alternate Formulation: Weighted Residual Method, Galerkin Method;

Problems with C1 Continuity: Beam Bending, Connectivity and Assembly of C1 Continuity Elements

UNIT 3 FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS OF TWO DIMENSIONAL PROBLEMS 12 Hrs.

Variation Functional; 2-D Elements (Triangles and Quadrilaterals) and Shape Functions. Natural Coordinates, Numerical

Integration, Elemental Equations, .Connectivity and Assembly, Imposition of Boundary Conditions. Sub-parametric, Iso-

parametric and Super-parametric Elements; Elements with C1 Continuity.

UNIT 4 APPLICATION OF FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS 12 Hrs.

Plane Strain and Plane Stress Solid Mechanics Problems. 1-D and 2-D Heat transfer Finite Element Formulation ,

Axisymmetric (Heat Conduction) Problem Fluid Flow Finite Element Formulation, Formulation of thermal stress Problems. Free

Vibration Problems, Formulation of Eigen Value Problem, FEM Formulation.

UNIT 5 INTRODUCTION TO ADVANCED TOPICS 12 Hrs.

Time-dependent Problems, Combination of Galerkin FEM and FDM (Finite Difference Method), Convergence and

Stability of FD Scheme Three dimensional problems-Tetrahedral Element- Isoperimetric Formulation, usage of various FEA

software packages.

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT/ REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Darly L.Logan A first course in the finite element method, Nelson .Cengage Learning 2007

2. Chandrupatla and Bologundu., Finite Elements in Engineering, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, 1997.

3. Rao, S. S., Finite Element Methods in Engineering, Pergamon Press, 1989.

4. Krishnamoorthy, C. S., Finite Element Analysis -Theory and Programming, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co, 1987.

5. Zienkiewicz, O. C., The Finite Element Method in Engg. Science, McGraw Hill, London, 1977





SPR5201

A D V A N C E D C O MP O S I TE S T R U C T U R E S L T P Credits Total Marks

4 0 0 4 100

C O U R S E O B J E C T I V E S

To introduce the various types of c o mp o s i t e materials and their fabrication t e chniq ues .

To understand the mechanical behaviour of c o mp o s i t e plates and b e a m s .

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO COMPOSITES 12 Hrs.

Classification and characteristics, mechanical behavior of composite materials, basic terminology, and manufacture of laminated

fiber-reinforced composite materials, current and potential advantages of fiber –reinforced composite materials, applications of composite materials

UNIT 2 BEHAVIOUR OF A LAMINATE 12 Hrs.

Linear Elastic Stress-Strain Characteristics of FRP Composites, Stress and Strain co mponents in 3-D, Generalized Hooke’s Law in 3-D,

Stress-Strain relations in 3-D for Isotropic and orthotropic case. Mechanics of load-transfer in a Laminate. Prediction of Engineering Property in a

Laminate Lamina Stress-Strain a relation in material coordinates, Transformation relations, Lamina Stress - Strain relations in Structure Global

coordinates

UNIT 3 LAMINATED COMPOSITES &FAILURE T H E O R I E S 12 Hrs.

Mechanics of Plates/Kirchhoff’s Plate Theory. Laminate Strain -Displacement relationship based on Kirchhoff’s Hypothesis Laminate

Stiffness and ABD-Matrices. Symmetric .Anti-symmetric and Non-symmetric laminates Micromechanics of Laminate. Mechanical Failure Theories-

Maximum Stress Theory, Maximum Strain Theory, Tsai-Hill theory, Tsai-Wu Theory

UNIT 4 FABRICATION METHODS OF COMPOSITES S T R U C T U R E S

Introduction to Various Fabrication Methods, VARTM And RFI Methods, Method, Permeability

Measurements, VARTM Process Model, Process Parameters Of Characteristics, Concepts Of VARTM and

RFI Process Optimisation

UNIT 5 TESTING AND CHARACTERISATION OF COMPOSITES

12 Hrs.

Process Parameters In VARTM RFI

Method Film Casting And

12 Hrs.

Lamina strength characterization, tensile testing, compression testing, in -plane shear testing, short b e a m test, double cantilever b e a m test.

Physical properties characterisation of void content evaluation, fibre Vo lume Fraction Evaluation, DMA, DSC FOR Tg, Wet Properties Of Lamina,

NDE Methods, Ultrasonic A-scan and CT-Scan Methods For Characterisation Of Composites

Max. 6 0 Hours


1. Autar K.Kaw, Mechanics of Composite Materials, CRC press LLC 1 9 9 7

2. Calcote, L.R, " The Analysis of Laminated Composite Structures ", Von -Nostrand Reinhold Company,New York, 1 9 9 8 .

3. Jones, R.M., " Mechanics of Composite Materials ", McGraw Hill Kogakusha Ltd., Tokyo, 1 9 8 5 .

4. Agarwal, B.D., and Broutman, L.J., " Analysis and Performance of Fibre Composites ", John wiley and sons Inc., New York, 1 9 8 0 .

5. Lubin, G . , " Handbook on Advanced Plastics and Fibre Glass ", V o n Nostrand Reinhold Co., New York .

E N D S E M E S T E R EXAM Q U E S T I O N PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 E x a m Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 6 Questions of 5 Marks each uniformly distributed a m o n g all units – No Choice 3 0 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 14 Marks 7 0 M a r k s

SPR6531 CAD LAB - I L T P Credits Total Marks

0 0 6 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To familiarize the students with the working of CAD modelling.

To make the students aware of design automation and documentation.

PREREQUISITE

Exposure to at least one popular 3D Modelling Software, such as AutoCAD, Pro/E, Solidworks etc, is essential.

CAD INTRODUCTION:

Orthographic Views, Isometric Views, Sectional Views, Symbols - Welding, Surface Finish, Threads. Text, Bill of

Materials, Generating Orthographic view from Isometric View - Part Drawing, Assembly Drawing, Broken views, Detailed

Drawing - Dimensioning, Annotations, Title Block.

SOLID MODELING

Extrude, Revolve, Sweep, etc and Variational sweep, Loft, etc

SURFACE MODELING

Extrude, Sweep, Mesh of curves, Free form etc

FEATURE MANIPULATION

Copy, Edit, fillet, chamfer, mirror, rib, sweep, draft, Pattern, Shell, History operations etc.

ASSEMBLY

Constraints, Exploded Views, Interference check

DRAFTING

Layouts, Standard & Sectional Views, Detailing & Plotting.

VIEW COMMANDS

Rendering - wire frame – Shade - View ports.

FILE MANAGEMENT

DXF – IGES – SAT – DWG –PRT – Para solid, VRML


SPR6532

CAD LAB –II L T P Credits Total Marks

0 0 6 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To gain knowledge on analysis of the machine component

To understand the concepts of finite element analysis

SUGGESTED LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

Analysis of Mechanical Components – Use of FEA Packages

1. Stress analysis of a plate with a circular hole.

2. Stress analysis of rectangular L bracket

3. Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component

4. Stress analysis of beams (Cantilever, Simply supported, Fixed ends)

5. Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component

6. Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever, Simply supported, Fixed ends)

7. Harmonic analysis of a 2D component

8. Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component

9. Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

10. Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

SPR6533 CAD LAB –III L T P Credits Total Marks

0 0 6 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To gain knowledge on analysis of the machine component

To understand the concepts of finite element analysis

To Model and analyze Mechanical Components using Design and FEA Package.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.


Application of Joints and springs.

Simple Conduction example.

Thermal mixed boundary example (conduction / convection)

Analysis of a Bicycle

Linear Buckling Analysis

Non-linear Buckling Analysis

Sub structuring.

Analysis of piston

Analysis of connecting Rod

SPR6534

NON DESTRUCTIVE TESTING LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

0 0 6 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To impart knowledge of Radiographic Testing and Magnetic Particle Inspection

To impart knowledge of Ultrasonic Testing and Liquid Penetrant Testing

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS USING RADIOGRAPHIC TESTING AND MAGNETIC PARTICLE INSPECTION

1. Familiarisation of X-ray, Gamma ray equipments and Film Processing

2. Safety equipments and Calibration of Survey Meters

3. Radiographic Testing of plate butt weld by Single wall Single Image Technique - X-ray

4. Radiographic Testing of pipe butt weld by Panoramic Technique- Gamma rays

5. Radiographic Testing of pipe butt weld by Double wall Single image Technique - Gamma rays

6. Radiographic Testing of pipe butt weld by Double wall Double Image Technique- Gamma rays

7. Interpretation of Radiographs

8. Magnetic Particle Inspection of Welds - Dry method

9. Magnetic Particle Inspection of Welds - Wet and Fluorescent methods

10. Read Time Radiography of Tube welds.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS USING ULTRASONIC TESTING AND LIQUID PENETRANT TESTING

1. Familiarization of operations of Ultrasonic equipment

2. Basic calibrations of UT equipment

3. Drawing of DAC Curves by normal and angle probes

4. Ultrasonic Testing of Plate butt welds

5. Ultrasonic Testing of Pipe butt welds

6. Ultrasonic Testing of Tube butt welds

7. Testing of Raw materials - Plate

8. Testing of Raw materials - Forgings

9. Testing of Raw materials – Castings

10. Penetrant Testing of welds - Solvent Removable method

SPR6535 MANUFACTURING PROCESS LAB

L T P Credits Total Marks

0 0 6 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To impart knowledge of EDM, ECM, Resistance Welding, GTAW, Characterization, Casting and abrasive machining


1. Electrical Discharge Machining.

2. Electrochemical Machining.

3. Resistant welding & Fusion Welding of polymeric composites.

4. Production of polymer components by Injection moulding.

5. Electrical Discharge Alloying and Characterization

6. Stir casting of Aluminium based composites.

7. Weld bead performance on GMAW

8. Measurement of temperature distribution on GTAW process using thermocouple.

9. Water Hammer Forming

10. Abrasive Machining


SME6532 L T P Credits Total Marks

COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS LAB 0 0 6 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE Heat transfer & fluid flow analysis in pipes, cascades, ducts, heat exchanger, heat transfer equipment, Materials

processing using CFD package.

1. Flow in static mixer

2. Flow in a process injection-mixing pipe 3. Flow from a circular vent

4. Flow in an Axial rotor /stator arrangement

5. Multiphase flow in mixing vessel

6. External flow over Ahmed body 7. Supersonic flow in a Laval nozzle

8. Flow through a butterfly valve

9. Flow through an automatic catalytic converter

10. Flow through an engine inlet valve 11. Conjugate heat transfer in a process-heating coil

12. Combustion and radiation in a Can Combustor

SME6533 SIMULATION LAB


0 0 6 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To familiarize Standard Application Software for Solving HEAT TRANSFER PROBLEMS

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

SUGGESTED LIST OF EXPERIMENTS Heat exchanger analysis – NTU method Heat exchanger analysis – LMTD method Convection heat transfer analysis – Velocity boundary layer Convection heat transfer analysis – Internal flow Radiation heat transfer analysis – Emissivity Critical radius of insulation Lumped heat transfer analysis Conduction heat transfer analysis Condensation heat transfer analysis


SME6532 L T P Credits Total Marks

COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS LAB 0 0 6 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Heat transfer & fluid flow analysis in pipes, cascades, ducts, heat exchanger, heat transfer equipment, Materials processing using CFD package.

1. Flow in static mixer 2. Flow in a process injection-mixing pipe

3. Flow from a circular vent 4. Flow in an Axial rotor /stator arrangement

5. Multiphase flow in mixing vessel 6. External flow over Ahmed body

7. Supersonic flow in a Laval nozzle

8. Flow through a butterfly valve

9. Flow through an automatic catalytic converter

10. Flow through an engine inlet valve

11. Conjugate heat transfer in a process-heating coil

12. Combustion and radiation in a Can Combustor

SME6533 SIMULATION LAB


0 0 6 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To familiarize Standard Application Software for Solving HEAT TRANSFER PROBLEMS

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.


Heat exchanger analysis – NTU method

Heat exchanger analysis – LMTD method

Convection heat transfer analysis – Velocity boundary layer

Convection heat transfer analysis – Internal flow

Radiation heat transfer analysis – Emissivity

Critical radius of insulation

Lumped heat transfer analysis

Conduction heat transfer analysis Condensation heat transfer analysis


SME6534 CAD LAB


0 0 6 3 100

COURSE Objectives

To familiarize the students with the working of CAD modelling.

To make the students aware of design automation and documentation.

Prerequisite

Exposure to at least one high end 3D Modelling Software, such as AutoCAD, Pro/E, SOLIDWORKS, CATIA etc, is essential.

CAD Introduction:

Orthographic Views, Isometric Views, Sectional Views, Symbols related to Welding, Surface Finish, Threads. Text, Bill of Materials, Generating Orthographic view from Isometric View - Part Drawing, Assembly Drawing, Broken views, Detailed Drawing - Dimensioning, Annotations etc.

Solid modelling Extrude, Revolve, Sweep, Variational sweep, Loft, etc

Surface modelling

Extrude, Sweep, Mesh of curves, Free form etc

Feature manipulation

Copy, Edit, fillet, chamfer, mirror, rib, sweep, draft, Pattern, Shell, History operations etc.

Assembly Constraints, Exploded Views, Interference check etc

Drafting

Layouts, Standard & Sectional Views, Detailing & Plotting.

View commands

Rendering - wire frame – Shade - View ports.

File Management

DXF – IGES – SAT – DWG –PRT – Para solid, VRML

Outcomes Upon completion of this course, students will be able to:

Build 3D assembly, convert into many forms of 2D layouts, and detail the drawing in a desired format.

Give realistic look to objects and

Get the knowledge of product data exchange.


SME6535 SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

0 0 6 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE At the end of this course the students would have developed a thorough understanding of the Computer Aided

Finite Element Analysis packages with an ability to effectively use the tools of the analysis for solving practical problems arising in engineering design

Analysis of mechanical components — use of FEA packages like ANSYS, NASTRAN, ADAMS, MATLAB etc.


1. Machine elements under Static loads

2. Thermal Analysis of mechanical systems 3. Modal Analysis

4. Machine elements under Dynamic loads

5. Non-linear systems

6. Analysis of velocity and acceleration for mechanical linkages of different mechanisms.

SME6536 COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

0 0 6 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES x To make the students understand the fluid flow and thermal analysis using CFD software.

x To explore and compare design alternatives and better understand the implications of design choices before manufacturing.

Introduction to CFD Analysis and CFD Codes:

Theoretical background - Overview of CFD process - Geometry Modelling - Grid Generation - Commercial “general-purpose” CFD packages - Simple codes for specific problems.

Flow Solution Algorithms: Laminar/Turbulent Flows - Incompressible/Compressible Flows - Steady/Unsteady - Methods for Navier-Stokes

equations - Flow Adaptivity, Moving Meshes, etc.

Advanced Physical Models:

Turbulence - Multiphase (air/liquid fuel) Flows - Heat Transfer – Radiation – Other physical models such as Reacting flow, etc.

User Programming and Automation

Simulation run, Visualization, Analysis of results, Preprocessing & Post processing, Export results in various format.


SME6537 MICROSTRUCTURAL CHARCTERIZATION LAB


0 0 6 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To impart knowledge of X-ray diffraction techniques, FESEM and Atomic force microscope

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

SUGGESTED LIST OF EXPERIMENTS Preparation of materials by different techniques. Phase identification by X-ray diffraction of materials. Accurate lattice parameter determination by XRD High temperature XRD diffraction of materials Glancing angle incidence X-ray diffraction of thin films for phase identification. Optical microscopy of bulk metallic materials Epifluorescence microscopy of biomaterials Morphological studies of prepared materials by FESEM. Morphological studies and surface roughness changes in materials by atomic force microscope.


SME6538 THIN FILM DEPOSITION LAB 0 0 6 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To impart knowledge of thermal evaporation and sputtering of metallic materials

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

SUGGESTED LIST OF EXPERIMENTS Thermal evaporation of metallic materials Electron beam evaporation of ceramic materials DC magnetron sputtering of pure materials Reactive DC sputtering of metallic materials

Preparation of nitride thin films by magnetron sputtering Bilayer deposition of materials by magnetron sputtering

Substrate and target preparation for sputtering Spin coating of materials

SM E6539 POWDER METALLURGY AND L T P Credits Total Marks

METALLOGRAPHY LAB 0 0 6 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To impart knowledge of metallurgy and metallographic principles


1. Preparation of nanopowders by ball milling

2. Pelletizing of Nano and micron sized powders

3. Sintering of pellets in vacuum and atmospheric conditions 4. Cutting, polishing and etching of metallic materials

5. Density measurements of pellets by size and weight change

6. XRD of sintered and powder materials

7. FESEM of metallographically prepared samples. 8. Optical microscopy of metallographically prepared sintered pellet.

SAE6531 ADVANCED AIRCRAFT STRUCTURES LAB AB L T P Credits Total Marks

0 0 6 3 100

• To experimentally study the unsymmetrical bending of beams, find the location of shear centre , obtain the stresses in

circular discs and beams using photo elastic techniques, calibration of photo – elastic materials and study on vibration of beams


1. Buckling of columns

2. Unsymmetrical Bending of Beams

3. Shear Centre Location for Open and closed Section

4. Combined Loading

5. Stresses in Circular Disc Under Diametrical Compression – Photo Elastic Method

6. Vibration of Beams with Different Support Conditions

7. Determination of natural frequency of composite plate with different support conditions

8. Determination of elastic constants of a composite laminate.

9. Wagner beam

10. Determination of damping coefficient of different materials using half power method

SAE6532 ADVANCED AERODYNAMICS LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

0 0 6 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To familiarize the students in basic aerodynamics and use of wind tunnels


1. Calibration of subsonic wind tunnel

2. Pressure distribution over a smooth and rough cylinders

3. Pressure distribution over a symmetric aerofoil section

4. Pressure distribution over a cambered aerofoil section

5. Force measurement using wind tunnel balance for various models

6. Pressure distribution over a wing of symmetric aerofoil section

7. Pressure distribution over a wing of cambered aerofoil section

8. Flow visualization studies in incompressible flows

9. Calibration of supersonic wind tunnel

10. Supersonic flow visualization studies

11. Flow over airfoil at supersonic speed

12. Study on hypersonic wind tunnels

SAE6533 ADVANCED COMPUTATIONAL L T P Credits Total Marks

FLUID DYNAMICS LAB 0 0 6 3 100 COURSE OBJECTIVE

• To familiarize the students with the working of CFD codes


Writing programs to solve problems related to parabolic partial differential Equations, Elliptic partial differential equations, and hyperbolic partial differential equations, Incompressible Navier-Stokes Equations, Grid Generation Techniques, 1-D and 2-D stress analysis, 1-D and 2-D heat conduction with convective boundaries, Inviscid incompressible fluid flows, Use of ANSYS package.


SPR5601 INTEGRATED MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS L T P Credits Total.Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To gain knowledge on how computers are integrated at various levels of planning and manufacturing.

To develop a thorough understanding of the group technology, manufacturing process planning and control,

modern manufacturing systems


Objectives of a manufacturing system-identifying business opportunities and problems classification production

systems-linking manufacturing strategy and systems analysis of manufacturing operations. Automated Manufacturing

Systems, Computerized Manufacturing Support Systems, Reasons for Automation, Automation Strategies.

UNIT 2 GROUP TECHNOLOGY AND COMPUTER AIDED PROCESS PLANNING 12 Hrs.

Group Technology (GT) - Part Families - Parts Classification and Coding - Features of Parts Classification and

Coding Systems - Production Flow Analysis - Composite Part Concept - Machine Cell Design - Applications Of Group

Technology - Quantitative analysis of Cellular Manufacturing - Grouping of parts and Machines by Rank Order Clustering

- Arranging Machines in a GT Cell - Case studies. Structure of a Process Planning - Process Planning function-

Computer-Aided Process Planning ( CAPP) - Methods of CAPP - CAD based Process Planning – Computer generated time

standards.

UNIT 3 COMPUTER AIDED PLANNING AND CONTROL 12 Hrs.

Production planning and control-cost planning and control-inventory management-Material requirements

planning (MRP) - case studies- basics of JIT-Shop floor control-Factory data collection system-Automatic identification

system-barcode technology- automated data collection system. Development of actual shop floor control system

(involving LAN, communication server). Interface of shop floor controller with business systems (ERP or order system)

UNIT 4 COMPUTER MONITORING 12 Hrs.

Types of production monitoring systems-structure model of manufacturing process –process control &

strategies-direct digital control-supervisory computer control-computer in QC – contact inspection methods,

non-contact inspection method and Flexible Inspection systems – computer-aided testing- integration of CAQC with

CAD/CAM

UNIT 5 INTEGRATED MANUFACTURING SYSTEM 12 Hrs.

Role of integrative manufacturing in CAD/CAM integration – application - features – types of manufacturing

systems - machine tools-materials handling system - computer control system – DNC systems manufacturing cell.

Flexible manufacturing systems (FMS) – Introduction to FMS - Manufacturing integration model - flexible manufacturing

strategy - Components of FMS - case studies - human labor in the manufacturing system - computer integrated

manufacturing system benefits - Rapid prototyping – Artificial Intelligence and Expert system in CIM.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Groover, M.P., “Automation, Production System and CIM”, Prentice-Hall of India, 1998.

2. David Bedworth, “Computer Integrated Design and Manufacturing”, TMH, New Delhi, 1998.

3. Yorem Koren, “Computer Integrated Manufacturing Systems”, McGraw Hill, 1983.

4. Ranky, Paul G., “Computer Integrated Manufacturing”, Prentice Hall International 1986 .

5. Yeomamas, R.W. A. Choudry and P.J.W. Ten Hagen, “Design rules for a CIM system”, North Holland Amsterdam,

1985.

6. Radhakrishnan P, Subramanyan S.and Raju V., “CAD/CAM/CIM”, 2nd Edition New Age International (P) Ltd., New

Delhi, 2000.






SPR5602 INDUSTRIAL ROBOTICS AND PROGRAMMING L T P Credits Total.Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To understand the basic concepts associated with the design and functioning and applications of Robots

To study about the drives and sensors used in Robots

To learn the basics of robot cell design, robot kinematics and robot programming

To gain knowledge of application of artificial intelligence and expert systems in robotics

UNIT 1 FUNDAMENTALS OF ROBOT 12 Hrs.

Robot – Definition, Robot Anatomy – Co-ordinate Systems, Work Envelope, types and classification, Specifications – Pitch, Yaw, Roll, Joint Notations, Robot Parts and Functions, Need for Robots, Robot Applications. Robot Kinematics - Forward Kinematics, Inverse Kinematics and Differences; Forward Kinematics and Reverse Kinematics of Manipulators with Two, Three Degrees of Freedom, Four Degrees of Freedom, Homogeneous transformations – Derivations and Problems.

UNIT 2 ROBOT DRIVE SYSTEMS AND END EFFECTORS 12 Hrs. Pneumatic Drives, Hydraulic Drives, Mechanical Drives, Electrical Drives – D.C. Servo Motors, Stepper Motor, A.C.

Servo Motors – Salient Features, Applications and Comparison of Drives, End Effectors, Grippers – Mechanical Grippers, Pneumatic and Hydraulic Grippers, Magnetic Grippers, Vacuum Grippers; Two Fingered and Three Fingered Grippers; Internal Grippers and External Grippers; Selection and Design Considerations.

UNIT 3 SENSORS AND MACHINE VISION 12 Hrs. Requirements of a sensor, Principles and Applications of the following types of sensors – Position sensors,

Range Sensors, Proximity Sensors, Touch Sensors, Wrist Sensors, Compliance Sensors and Slip Sensors. Introduction to Machine vision - Image Processing and Analysis – Data Reduction: Edge detection, Segmentation Feature Extraction and Object Recognition - Algorithms. Applications of machine vision.

UNIT 4 ROBOT CELL DESIGN AND ECONOMIC ANALYSIS 12 Hrs. Robot work cell design and control, Safety in Robotics, Robot cell layouts – Multiple Robots and machine

interference, Robot cycle time analysis, Economic Analysis of Robots – Pay back Method, Equivalent Uniform Annual Cost ( EUAC) Method, Rate of Return Method. Industrial application of robots.

UNIT 5 ROBOT PROGRAMMING 12 Hrs.

Introduction, Various Programming Methods - Teach Pendant Programming, Lead through programming, Robot programming Languages –VAL II, RAIL and their Features. Programming – Motion Commands, Sensor Commands, End effector commands, Motion Interpolation, WAIT, SIGNAL & DELAY Commands, Branching, Robot Language Structure and Simple Programming Examples such as Palletizing, Loading a Machine etc.,

Max. 60 Hours


1. Groover, M.P. “Industrial Robotics – Technology, Programming and Applications”, McGraw-Hill, 2001 2. Fu.K.S. Gonzalz.R.C., and Lee C.S.G., “Robotics Control, Sensing, Vision and Intelligence”, McGraw-Hill Book Co., 1987

3. Yoram Koren, “Robotics for Engineers”, McGraw-Hill Book Co., 1992 4. Janakiraman.P.A., “Robotics and Image Processing”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 1995

5. Timothy Jordanides et al ,”Expert Systems and Robotics “, Springer –Verlag, New York, May 1991


PART A : 6 Questions of 5 Marks each uniformly distributed among all units – No Choice 30 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 14 Marks. 70 Marks

SPR5603 RAPID PROTOTYPING L T P Credits Total.Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To understand the various Rapid Prototyping process involved in the CAD Process based on requirements.

To understand the design steps involved in evaluating the dimensions of a component to satisfy functional operation.


Need for the compression in product development, history of Rapid Prototyping systems, survey of applications, growth of Rapid Prototyping industry and classification of RP systems. Rapid prototyping CAD process-Morphology of Design – Applications RP in CAD Design Process.

UNIT 2 RAPID PROTOTYPING PROCESSES 12 Hrs.

Stereo lithography Systems- Principle, process parameters, process details, data preparation, data files and machine details, applications. Fused Deposition Modeling- Principle, process parameters, path generation, and applications. Selective Laser Sintering- Types of machines, principles of operation, process parameters, data preparation for SLS, applications. Laminated Object Manufacturing- Principle of operation, Laminated object manufacturing materials, process details, applications.

UNIT 3 CONCEPT MODELERS 12 Hrs.

Principle of Thermo jet printer- Sander’s model market, 3-D printer- Genisys Xs printer- JP system 5-objects Quadra system. Solid Ground Curing- Principle of operation, machine details, applications. Laser Engineered Net Shaping (Lens) – Net shaping development at Sandia National Lab.

UNIT 4 RAPID TOOLING 12 Hrs.

Indirect rapid tooling - silicone rubber tooling, aluminum filled epoxy tooling, spray metal tooling, cast Kirksite, 3D Keltool, etc., direct rapid tooling - direct AIM- quick cast process, copper polyamide- rapid tool- DMILS- sand casting tooling- laminate tooling- soft tooling Vs hard tooling.

UNIT 5 RAPID MANUFACTURING PROCESS OPTIMIZATION 12 Hrs.

Factors influencing accuracy, data preparation errors, part building errors, errors in finishing, influence of part build orientation. Software For RP- stereolithography files, overview of solid view, magic’s, mimics, magic’s communicator, etc., Allied Processes- Vacuum casting, surface digitizing, surface generation from point cloud, surface modification, data transfer to solid models.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Terry Wohlers, "Wohlers Report 2001", Wohlers Associates, 2013.

2. Pham D T and Dimov S S, "Rapid Manufacturing", Verlag, 2012.

3. Paul F Jacobs, "Stereo lithography and other RP&M Technologies", SME, 1996. 4. FDM 1650 User Guide.

5. Sinter station 2500 plus System User Guide.


PART A : 6 Questions of 5 Marks each uniformly distributed among all units – No Choice PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 14 Marks.

Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. 30 Marks

70 Marks

SPR5604 COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS L T P Credits Total.Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE Assimilation of basic concepts to impart use, application of fluid flow

UNIT 1 GOVERNING DIFFERENTIAL EQUATION AND FINITE DIFFERENCE METHOD 12 Hrs. Classification, Initial and Boundary conditions – Initial and Boundary Value problems – Finite difference

method, Central, Forward, Backward difference, Uniform and non-uniform Grids, Numerical Errors, Grid Independence Test.

UNIT 2 DISCRETIZATION METHODS 12 Hrs. Nature of numerical methods – Methods of Deriving the Discretization Equations – Taylor Series formulation – variational formulation-Method of weighted residuals -Control volume –Formulation

UNIT 3 CONDUCTION AND CONVECTION HEAT TRANSFER 12 Hrs. Steady one-dimensional conduction, two and three dimensional steady state problems, Transient one-dimensional problem, Two-dimensional Transient Problems.

Steady One-Dimensional and Two-Dimensional Convection – diffusion, unsteady one-dimensional convection – diffusion, unsteady two-dimensional convection – Diffusion – Introduction to finite element method – solution of steady heat conduction by FEM – Incompressible flow – simulation by FEM

UNIT 4 INCOMPRESSIBLE FLUID FLOW 12 Hrs. Governing Equations, Stream Function – Verticity method, Determination of pressure for viscous flow, SIMPLE Procedure of Patankar and Spalding, Computation of Boundary layer flow, finite difference approach.

UNIT 5 TURBULENCE MODELS AND GRID GENERATION 12 Hrs.

Algebraic Models – One equation model, K – є Models, Standard and High and Low Reynolds number models,

Prediction of fluid flow and heat transfer using standard codes. Grid generation: general transformation of the equations, Matrices and Jacobians, Stretched and compressed

grids, Boundary fitted coordinate systems, Modern developments in grid generation — Finite volume mesh generation, unstructured meshes and Cartesian meshes

Max. 60 Hours


1. Muralidhar, K., and Sundararajan, T., “Computational Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer”, Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi, 1995.

2. Ghoshdasdidar, P.S., “Computer Simulation of flow and heat transfer” Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd., 1998.

3. Subas, V.Patankar “Numerical heat transfer fluid flow”, Hemisphere Publishing Corporation, 1980.

4. Taylor, C and Hughes, J.B. “Finite Element Programming of the Navier-Stokes Equation”, Pineridge Press Limited, U.K., 1981.

5. Anderson, D.A., Tannehill, J.I., and Pletcher, R.H., “Computational fluid Mechanics and Heat Transfer “Hemisphere Publishing Corporation, New York, USA, 1984.

6. Fletcher, C.A.J. “Computational Techniques for Fluid Dynamics 1” Fundamental and General Techniques, Springer – Verlag, 1987.

7. Fletcher, C.A.J. “Computational Techniques for fluid Dynamics 2” Specific Techniques for Differen t Flow Categories, Springer – Verlag, 1987.

8. Bose, T.X., “Numerical Fluid Dynamics” Narosa Publishing House, 1997.


Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 6 Questions of 5 Marks each uniformly distributed among all units – No Choice 30 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 14 Marks. 70 Marks



SPR5605 APPLICATION OF ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE IN L T P Credits Total.Marks

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING 4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To understand the various procedures involved in apply the concept of artificial Intelligence in the field of

Mechanical Engineering

To provide its application in Mechanical systems that prepare students for their engineering practice by

organization by conversant with order policies, designing, manufacturing considerations.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE 12 Hrs.

Basic concepts of Artificial intelligence and expert systems - System Components - System architecture and

Data flow – System Operations. - factory vision systems - machine learning, speech and touch-emmen domains-

misconceptions-human intelligence-development of an AI system-goal fact, obtaining data, rules, inferences-verification

through the inference mechanism.

UNIT 2 KNOWLEDGE BASED SYSTEM 12 Hrs.

Knowledge Engineering-reasoning strategies-frame, rules, protocol analysis - fuzzy logic -semantic

networks-object oriented programming – Knowledge based approaches to design mechanical parts. acquiring

knowledge from experts

UNIT 3 AI APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT TOOLS 12 Hrs.

Building of knowledge system- choosing a tool for building expert system- inheritance- a knowledge base tool with

database features-application areas-problem features

UNIT 4 AI INDUSTRY 12 Hrs.

Intelligent system for equipment selection - Intelligent system for project management & factory monitoring.

Scheduling in manufacturing – scheduling the shop floor – Diagnosis & trouble shooting–manufacturing-welding

painting grinding- distribution –field devices and expert system integration-diagnosis and trouble- shooting overview of

robot applications-welding-spray painting-grinding-path handling-transfer- assembly operation-parts sorting and

inspection.

UNIT 5 PERCEPTION AND LEARNING 12 Hrs.

Techniques used in solving perceptional problems- constraint satisfaction-random learning and neural nets-concept

learning –learning by analogy –introduction to AL programming language

Max. 60 Hours


1. Vinston, P.H, “Artificial Intelligence”, Addison Wesley

2. Wilsson, N.J, “Principles of Atificial Intelligence”, Tioga Publishing Co., 1980

3. Rich E., “Artificial Intelligence ” McGraw Hill, 1983

4. Hafter, Richard and Chemieleswski, A., “ Robotic Engineering ”, Prentice Hall International Edition





SPR5606

MANUFACTURING INFORMATION SYSTEMS L T P Credits Total.Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To understand the various procedures involved in the Manufacturing Database Design Process based on strength requirements.

To provide an importance of databases and its application in manufacturing systems that prepare students for their engineerin g

practice by organization by conversant with order policies, data base terminologies, designing, manufacturing considerations.


The Evolution of order policies, From MRP I, MRP II, MRP III to ERP – Agile Manufacturing Information Systems, Manufacturing

Database Integration.

UNIT 2 DATABASE 12 Hrs.

Terminologies – Entities and attributes – Data models, schema and subschema - Data Independence – ER Diagram – UML notation for

describing the enterprise–wide data objects Trends in database, Teamcenter Introduction.

UNIT 3 DESIGNING DATABASE 12 Hrs.

Hierarchical model – Network approach- Relational Database concepts, principles, keys,– functional dependency – Normalization types –

relational operations- Query Languages-Case studies.

UNIT 4 MANUFACTURING CONSIDERATION 12 Hrs.

The product and its structure, inventory and process flow – Shop floor control Data structure and procedure – various models – the

order scheduling module, Input/output analysis module, and stock status database – the complete IOM database – Case studies

UNIT 5 INFORMATION SYSTEM FOR MANUFACTURING 12 Hrs.

Parts oriented production information system – concepts and structure – Computerized production scheduling, online production

control systems, Computer based production m a n a g em en t system, computerized manufacturing information system

-RFID-Telecommunication– case study.

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCES BOOKS

1. Sartori, L.G., “Manufacturing Information Systems”, Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, 1988.

2. Date, C.J., ”An Introduction to Database Systems” Addison Wesley”, 8 th Edn,. 2003

3. Orlicky, G., “Material Requirements Planning”, McGraw-Hill, 1994.

4. Kerr, R., “Knowledge based Manufacturing Management”, Addison-Wesley, 1991.

5. Oliver, G. and Wolfhard, K., “RFID in Manufacturing”, Kubach.vwe.,2008

6. Franjo, C., “Manufacturing Information & Data Systems Analysis, Design & Practice”, Butterworth-Heinemann, 2002.

7. Weiming S, “Information Technology for Balanced Manufacturing Systems”, Springer, 2006.





SPR5607

MECHATRONICS IN MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS L T P Credits Total.Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To enable the student to understand the modern mechatronics components

To present the underlying principles and alternatives for mechatronics systems design

To provide the student with the opportunity for hands-on experience with the related components of the technology for diverse domains of application


The design process; systems; measurement systems; control systems; programmable logic controller; examples of mechatronic systems. Fundamental concepts in manufacturing and automation, definition of automation, reasons for automating. Types of production and types of automation, automation strategies, levels of automation.

UNIT 2 SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS 12 Hrs.

Introduction – Performance Terminology – Displacement, Position and Proximity – Velocity and Motion – Fluid pressure – Temperature sensors – Light sensors – Selection of sensors – Signal processing.– Interfacing D/A converters and A/D converters, Interfacing input and output devices, interfacing with PC.

UNIT 3 ACTUATORS 12 Hrs.

Control devices – Electro hydraulic control devices, electro pneumatic proportional controls – Rotational drives – pneumatic motors: continuous and limited rotation – Hydraulic motor: continuous and limited rotation – motion converters, fixed ratio, invariant motion profile.

UNIT 4 MECHATRONICS IN MANUFACTURING 12 Hrs.

Production unit; input/output and challenges in Mechatronic production units; knowledge required. Automated assembly-design for automated assembly, types of automated assembly systems, part feeding devices, analysis of multi-station assembly machines. AS/RS, RFID system, AGVs, modular fixturing.

UNIT 5 CASE STUDIES IN DESIGNIND MECHATRONIC SYSTEMS 12 Hrs.

Basic structure of PLC, input/output programming, timers, relays, counters, Stages in design, traditional and mechatronic design, possible design solutions, Mechatronic design of a coin counter; robotic walking machine; timed switch; windscreen wiper motion; pick and place robot; car park barriers; bar code reader; car engine management.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Bolton, W ‘Mechatronics’, Pearson Education

2. Devdas Shetty and Richard A. Kolk, ‘Mechatronics System Design’, Vikas Publishing House

3. Appuu Kuttan K. K., ‘Introduction to Mechatronics’, Oxford Press, London

4. David G. Alciatore and Michael B. Histand, ‘Introduction to Mechatronics and Measurement Systems’, Tata McGraw Hill

5. Brain Morriess, ‘Automated Manufacturing Systems – Actuators, Controls, Sensors and Robotics’, McGraw Hill International Edition




SPR5608

ADVANCED MACHINE TOOL DESIGN L T P Credits Total.Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To understand the procedure to design a machine tool and structure of machine tool

To learn the component of machine tool and its design

To understand the concept of controlling and maintaining the machine tool

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO MACHINE TOOLS 12 Hrs. Types and capabilities of Machine tools-Constructional and Operational features-Techno economical

prerequisites for undertaking the design of new Machine tool-General requirement of Machine tool design-Engineering design process applied to Machine tool-Layout of Machine tool

UNIT 2 DESIGN OF MACHINE TOOL STRUCTURE 12 Hrs. Design procedure of Machine tool structure-Material of Machine tool structure-Static and Dynamic stiffness-Factors affecting stiffness of Machine tool structure-Design of Bed, Column and Table

UNIT 3 DESIGN OF GUIDE WAYS AND SPINDLE 12 Hrs.

Function of Guideways-Design procedure for Guideways-Types –Aerostatic Guideways, Antifriction Guideways, Hydrodynamic Guideways and Hydrostatic Guideways-Stick slip motion in Guideways Types of Spindle-Requirement of Spindle-Design procedure for Spindle and Spindle support

UNIT 4 DESIGN OF MACHINE TOOL DRIVES AND CONTROL SYSTEM 12 Hrs.

Types of Machine Tool Drives-Electrical,Mechanical-Stepped Regulation of Speed-Design of Speed box-Machine Tool Drives using multiple speed motors-Stepless Regulation of speed and feed rates-Control system for changing speed and feed-Manual and Automatic control system

UNIT 5 TESTING AND MAINTENANCE OF MACHINE TOOL 12 Hrs. Significance, Performance and Geometrical test on Lathe, Milling, Drilling and Shaping machine. Maintenance of machine tool-preventive maintenance, corrective maintenance-reconditioning of machine tool

Max. 60 Hours


1. Mehta, N.K., “Machine Tool design”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1989

2. Koenisberger, F., “Design Principles of Metal cutting Machine Tools”, Pergamon Press, 1964.

3. Acherkan, N., “Machine Tool Design”, Vol. 3 & 4, MIR Publishers, Moscow, 1968

4. Sen.G. and Bhattacharya, A., “Principles of Machine Tools”, Vol.2, NCB.Calcutta, 1973





SPR5609

REVERSE ENGINEERING L T P Credits Total.Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To understand the Reverse Engineering (RE) Methodology

To understand Computer-Aided RE

To understand RE applications in software engineering

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION 12 Hrs. History of Reverse -Scope and tasks of RE - Domain analysis- process of duplicating– RE-Methodology, RE Steps, System level Design RE- Applications

UNIT 2 TOOLS FOR RE 12 Hrs. Tools for RE - Need & Techniques, Data collection, Point-Cloud of data - Functionality- dimensional-developing

technical data – digitizing techniques – construction of surface model – solid-part material- characteristics evaluation -software and application- CMM and its feature capturing – surface and solid modelling - prototyping – verification– Design experiments to evaluate a Reverse Engineering tool

UNIT 3 RE CONCEPTS 12 Hrs.

` Preserving and preparation for the four stage process – Evaluation and Verification- Technical Data Generation, Data Verification, Project Implementation - Engineering Specifications - Computer-Aided RE - Forward Engineering Design

UNIT 4 DATA MANAGEMENT 12 Hrs. Data reverse engineering – Three data Reverse engineering strategies – Definition – organization data issues –

Software application – Finding reusable software components – Recycling real-time embedded software– Rule based detection for reverse Engineering user interfaces – Reverse Engineering of assembly programs: A model based approach and its logical basics

UNIT 5 INTEGRATION 12 Hrs. Cognitive approach to program understated – Integrating formal and structured methods in reverse engineering – Integrating reverse engineering, reuse and specification tool environments to reverse engineering.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Biggerstaff, T J Design Recovery for Maintenance and Reuse, IEEE Corpn. July 1991

2. Rugaban, S. White paper on RE, Technical Report, Georgia Instt.of Technology, 1994

3. Katheryn, A. Ingle, Reverse Engineering, McGraw-Hill, 1994

4. Aiken, Peter, Data Reverse Engineering, McGraw-Hill, 1996

5. Linda Wills, Reverse Engineering, Kluiver Academic Publishers, 1996




SPR561 0 ADVANCED COMPOSITE MATERIALS AND L T P Credits Total.Marks

MECHANICS 4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To understand the fundamentals of composite materials, its strength and its mechanical behavior.

To understand the thermo-mechanical behavior and study of residual stresses in Laminates during processing.

To learn the various failure criterion of laminates

UNIT 1 LAMINA CONSTITUTIVE RELATIONS 12 Hrs.

Definition –Need – General Characteristics, Applications. Fibers – Glass, Carbon, Ceramic and Aramid fibers. Matrices – Polymer, Graphite, Ceramic and Metal Matrices – Characteristics of fibers, additives and interphases, matrices. Manufacturing: Bag Moulding – Compression Moulding – Pultrusion – Filament Winding – Other Manufacturing Processes. Lamina Constitutive Equations: Lamina Assumptions – Macroscopic Viewpoint. Generalized Hooke’s Law. Reduction to Homogeneous Orthotropic Lamina – Isotropic limit case, Orthotropic Stiffness matrix (Qij), Typical Commercial material properties, Rule of Mixtures. Generally Orthotropic Lamina – Transformation Matrix, Transformed Stiffness.

UNIT 2 FLAT PLATE LAMINATE CONSTITUTIVE RELATIONS 12 Hrs. Definition of stress and Moment Resultants. Strain Displacement relations. Basic Assumptions of Laminated

anisotropic plates. Laminate Constitutive Equations – Coupling Interactions, Balanced Laminates, Symmetric Laminates, Angle Ply Laminates, Cross Ply Laminates. Laminate Structural Moduli. Evaluation of Lamina Properties from Laminate Tests. Quasi-Isotropic Laminates. Determination of Lamina stresses within Laminates.

UNIT 3 LAMINA STRENGTH ANALYSIS 12 Hrs.

Introduction Maximum Stress and Strain Criteria. Von-Misses Yield criterion for Isotropic Materials. Generalized Hill’s Criterion for Anisotropic materials. Tsai-Hill’s Failure Criterion for Composites. Tensor Polynomial (Tsai-Wu) Failure criterion. Prediction of laminate Failure. Hygrothermal stress-strain relationship for unidirectional and angle lamina- Warpage of laminate

UNIT 4 ANALYSIS OF LAMINATED FLAT PLATES 12 Hrs. Equilibrium Equations of Motion. Energy Formulations. Static Bending Analysis. Buckling Analysis. Free

Vibrations – Natural Frequencies-Design and failure criterion for a laminate-Interlaminar stresses-Impact,fracture and fatigue resistance of laminates

UNIT 5 EFFECT OF THERMAL PROPERTIES 12 Hrs. Modification of Hooke’s Law due to thermal properties – Modification of Laminate Constitutive Equations.

Orthotropic Lamina – special Laminate Configurations – Unidirectional, Off-axis, Symmetric Balanced Laminates – Zero C.T.E laminates, Thermally Quasi-Isotropic Laminates -Longitudinal and transverse thermal expansion coefficient

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Gibson, R.F., Principles of Composite Material Mechanics, McGraw-Hill, 1994, Second Edition - CRC press in progress. 2. Hyer, M.W., “Stress Analysis of Fiber – Reinforced Composite Materials”, McGraw-Hill, 1998

3. Issac M. Daniel and Ori Ishai, “Engineering Mechanics of Composite Materials”, Oxford University Press-2006, First Indian Edition -2007

4. Mallick, P.K., Fiber –”Reinforced Composites: Materials, Manufacturing and Design”, Maneel Dekker Inc, 1993.

5. Halpin, J.C., “Primer on Composite Materials, Analysis”, Techomic Publishing Co., 1984. 6. Agarwal, B.D., and Broutman L.J., “Analysis and Performance of Fiber Composites”, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1990.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 6 Questions of 5 Marks each uniformly distributed among all units – No Choice 30 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 14 Marks. 70 Marks


SPR5611

CONCURRENT ENGINEERING L T P Credits Total.Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To have knowledge about Information Technology and Design in Concurrent Engineering.

To understand the Manufacturing concept and Management related to Concurrent Engineering.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION 12 Hrs. Extensive definition of Concurrent Engineering – Need of Concurrent Engineering – CE design methodologies

– Tools and Techniques of Concurrent Engineering - Organizing for CE – Implementation of CE.

UNIT 2 USE OF INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY 12 Hrs. IT support – Solid modeling – Product data management – Collaborative product commerce – Artificial

Intelligence-Expert systems – Software hardware co-design. CE process invariants, various class of information models, merits and demerits.

UNIT 3 DESIGN STAGE 12 Hrs. Life-cycle design of products – opportunity for manufacturing enterprises – modality of Concurrent Engineering. Design

– Automated analysis idealization control – Concurrent engineering in optimal structural design

– Real time constraints. Emerging engineering strategies of Total Design, Design for Manufacturing and Assembly. Concurrent function deployment: Components of CFD, limitations concurrent product development, concurrent function development, CFD methodology application.

UNIT 4 MANUFACTURING CONCEPTS AND ANALYSIS 12 Hrs.

Manufacturing competitiveness – Checking the design process – conceptual design mechanism – Qualitative physical approach – An intelligent design for manufacturing system – JIT system – low inventory – modular – Modeling and reasoning for computer based assembly planning – Design of Automated manufacturing. Rapid prototyping, reliability, bath tub curve, machinability, serviceability.

UNIT 5 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 12 Hrs.

Life Cycle semi realization – design for economics – evaluation of design for manufacturing cost – concurrent mechanical design – decomposition in concurrent design – negotiation in concurrent engineering design studies – product realization taxonomy – plan for Project Management on new product development – bottleneck technology development. Quality Function Deployment, concurrent planning and development using quality deployment function. Total Value management: TQM, Total value management, methodology for TVM, major elements of TVM, TVM in product development process.

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Anderson MM and Hein, L. Berlin, “Integrated Product Development”, Springer Verlog, 1987.

2. Cleetus, J, “Design for Concurrent Engineering”, Concurrent Engg. Research Centre, Morgantown, WV, 1992.

3. Andrew Kusaik, “Concurrent Engineering: Automation Tools and Technology”, Wiley, JOhn and Sons Inc., 1992.

4. Prasad, “Concurrent Engineering Fundamentals: Integrated Product Development”, Prentice Hall, 1996. 5. Sammy G Sinha, “Successful Implementation of Concurrent Product and Process”, Wiley, John and Sons Inc., 1998.




SPR5612

SMART MATERIALS AND APPLICATIONS L T P Credits Total.Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE • The objective of this course is to familiarize students with different classes of ceramic and polymeric smart

materials; development of actuators and sensors and their integration into a smart structure.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO INTELLIGENT MATERIALS 12 Hrs. Intelligent materials: Primitive functions of intelligent materials; Intelligence inherent in materials; Materials intelligently harmonizing with humanity; Intelligent biological materials.

UNIT 2 SMART MATERIALS AND STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS 12 Hrs. Actuator materials; Sensing technologies; Micro-sensors; Intelligent systems; Hybrid smart materials; Passive

sensory smart structures; Reactive actuator-based smart structures; Active sensing and reactive smart structures; Smart skins

UNIT 3 ELECTRO-RHEOLOGICAL (ER) FLUIDS 12 Hrs. Electro-Rheological (ER) Fluids: Suspensions and electro-rheological fluids; The electro-rheological phenomenon;

Charge migration mechanism for the dispersed phase; Electro-rheological fluid actuators. Piezoelectric Materials: Background; Piezoelectricity; Industrial piezoelectric materials; Smart materials featuring

piezoelectric elements.

UNIT 4 SHAPE MEMORY MATERIALS 12 Hrs. Background on shape-memory alloys; Applications of shape-memory-alloys; Continuum applications: structures

and machine systems; Discrete applications; Impediments to applications of shape-memory-alloys; Shape-memory-plastics.

Fiber-optics: an overview; Advantages of fiber-optics; Light propagation in an optical fiber; Embedding optical fibers in fibrous polymeric thermosets; Fiber-optic strain sensors.

UNIT 5 PIEZOELECTRIC VIBRATIONS ABSORBER SYSTEMS 12 Hrs. Introduction; The single mode absorber, theory, design solution, extension including viscous modal damping, the

electromechanical coupling coefficient, inductance, experimental results; The multimode absorber, derivation of transfer function, design solution, self-tuning absorber, performance function, control scheme.

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Gandhi, M.V. and Thompson, B.S. Smart Materials and structures (2nd edition), Chapman & Hall, 1992 2. Guran, H.S. Tzou, G.L. Anderson, and M. Natori, Structure Systems: Smart Structures, Devices and System (Part 1), and

Materials and Structures (Part 2), World Scientific Publications, 1998 3. Gabbert, U. and Tzou, H.S. Smart Structures and Structuronic System, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2001 4. Banks, H.T., Smith, R.C. and Qang, Y.W. Smart Material structures: Modeling, Estimation and Control (6th edition), John

Wiley & Sons, 1997

5. Bryan Culshaw, Smart Structures and Materials, Artech House, 1996 6. Mel Schwartz, Encyclopedia of Smart Materials, 2 Volume set, March 2002



SPR561 3 PRODUCTION AUTOMATION AND CNC L T P Credits Total.Marks

TECHNOLOGY 4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To understand the various automated production activities

To study the automated systems and drives

To know the smooth transition from automated production to CNC Technology


Concept and scope of industrial automation – mechanization and automation, classification, balancing of assembly line using available algorithms. Transfer line-monitoring system (TLMS) using Line Status, Line efficiency. Buffer stock Simulation in assembly line.

UNIT 2 AUTOMATED HANDLING SYSTEMS 12 Hrs.

Working principles and techniques, job orienting and feeding devices. Transfer mechanisms- automated feed cut of components, performance analysis. Uses of various types of handling systems, including AGV and its various guiding technologies.

UNIT 3 AUTOMATION DRIVES AND CIRCUITS 12 Hrs.

Design aspects of various elements of hydraulic systems such as pumps, valves, filters, reservoirs, accumulators, actuators, intensifiers. Pneumatic fundamentals - control elements, position and pressure sensing - logic circuits - switching circuits -sequential circuits - cascade methods - mapping methods – step counter method - compound circuit design - combination circuit design.

UNIT 4 CONCEPTS OF CNC SYSTEMS 12 Hrs.

Concepts, features, fundamentals, advantages and classification of NC systems Control system fundamentals, adaptive & feedback controller, transfer function, system stability, Transducer, actuators, MCU, CNC machine tooling, CNC machine control systems– ACO and ACC systems.

UNIT 5 CNC PART PROGRAMMINGS 12 Hrs.

NC part programming, CNC part programming, ‘G’ and ‘M’ codes, Graphical Numerical Control - part programming - design of post processor. Manual part programming. Computer aided part programming - post processor – APT programming – programming for CNC turning center, CNC Millers, Machining center and CNC EDM.

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Groover, M.P., CAD/CAM- Prentice Hall

2. Pressman R.S, Numerical Control and CAM-. John Wiley 1993 Williams

3. Scrope Kalpakjian, “Manufacturing processes for Engineering Materials”, Addison Wesley, 1997.

4. Radhakrishnan, P., “Computer Numerical Control Machines”, New Central Book Agencies, 1997.

5. Yoram Korem., “Computer control of Manufacturing systems”, Mc Graw Hill, 1986.




SPR5614

ROBOT DESIGN AND PROGRAMMING L T P Credits Total.Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To teach the students about the kinematic arrangement of robots and its applications in the area of manufacturing sectors.

To make students how to select and design motors, gear trains, and mechanisms

To impart knowledge to students about programming of robot and Artificial intelligence technique


Definition, Need, Types of robots – Classifications – Configuration, work volume, Robot manipulators - representation of translation, rotation, links and joints, Degrees of freedoms, End Effecters - types, Mechanical & other grippers, Tool as end effectorApplications of robot -Material transfer, Machine loading & unloading, processingoperations,Assembly & Inspectors

UNIT 2 ROBOT SENSORS AND ACTUATORS 12 Hrs.

Control Loops, Basic Control System Concepts & Models, Control System, Analysis, Robot Activation & Feedback Components, Sensors, position, velocity, force, temperature, pressure sensors – Contact and non-contact sensors, infrared sensors, RCC, vision sensors - Sensors in Robotics, Tactile Sensors, Proximity & Range Sensors, Sensor BasedSystemsSensing &Digitizing, Machine Vision System –Actuators,magnetostrictive actuators-characteristics of actuating systemsPower Transmission SystemsDesign of Robots –comparison, microprocessors control of electric motors, shape memory type metals,

UNIT 3 ROBOT KINEMATICS 12 Hrs.

Coordinate Frames, Rotations, Homogeneous Coordinates, Arm Equation of Planer Robot, Four axis SCARA Robot, TCV, Inverse Kinematics of Planer, Introduction – Matrix representation Homogeneous transformation, forward and inverse – Kinematic equations Inverse Kinematicrelationsdifferential motion andvelocity of frames – dynamic equations of motion, position and force control and simulation

UNIT 4 ROBOT DYNAMICS AND TRAJECTORY PLANNING 12 Hrs.

Manipulator Path Control- Linear, Quadratic and Cubic Interpolation, WorkSpace Analysis, Robot Dynamics – Langrangian Dynamics of one and two linkrobot armLagrangeon mechanics, dynamic equations for sing, double and multiple DOF robots –static force analysis of robots, Trajectory planning – joint space, Cartesian spacedescription and trajectory planning – third order, fifth order - Polynomial trajectoryplanning

UNIT 5 ROBOT PROGRAMMING & AI TECHNIQUES 12 Hrs.

Types of Programming – Teach Pendant programming – Methods, Robot programme as a path in space,Motion interpolation, level & task level languages, Robot languages;Programming in suitable languages - State space search, Problemreduction, Use of predictive logic, Means -Ends Analysis, Problem solving,Robot learning, Robot task planning – Basic Concepts of AI techniques – Concept of knowledge representations – Expert system and itscomponents

Max. 60 Hours


1. Groover.M.P. Industrial Robotics, McGraw – Hill International edition, 1996. 2. Wesley E Snyder R, ‘Industrial Robots, Computer Interfacing and Control’, PrenticeHall International Edition, 1988.

3. YoremKoren, “Robotics for Engineers”

4. Richard D. KIafter et al, “Robotic Engineering -an Integrated Approach”, PHI




SPR5615

QUALITY MANAGEMENT L T P Credits Total.Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To understand the concept and basics of the roll of “Quality Engineering Department” in Industries and their

functions.

To enable the students to understand the preparations of various Quality Control Charts and importance of six

sigma concept and its uses.

To understand the concepts and implementation of Total Quality Management system in industries.

UNIT 1 STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL 12 Hrs.

Definition of Quality, Dimensions of Quality, Statistical Fundamentals – Measures of central Tendency and

Dispersion, Population and Sample, Ogive curves, Normal Curve, Control Charts for variables and attributes, Process

capability, Concept of six sigma.

UNIT 2: RELIABILITY 12 Hrs.

Definition of reliability, Life testing, requirements, methods, Methods of reliability improvement, component

redundancy, system redundancy, types of redundancies-series, parallel, Series parallel, stand by and hybrid.

UNIT 3 QUALITY SYSTEMS 12 Hrs.

ISO 9000:2000 Quality system- needs, Elements, Documentation, Implementation of the Quality System, QS 9000

Quality System, ISO 14000 Quality System -Documentation, Quality Auditing – Concept, Requirements and Benefits

UNIT 4 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT 12 Hrs.

Quality Planning, Quality costs – Analysis Techniques for Quality Costs, Basic concepts of Total Quality

Management, Historical Review, Principles of TQM, Leadership – Concepts, Quality Council, Quality Statements,

Strategic Planning, Deming Philosophy, Customer satisfaction –Customer Complaints, Customer Retention, Employee

Involvement – Motivation, Empowerment, Teams, Recognition and Reward, Supplier Partnership – Partnering, sourcing,

Supplier Selection, Supplier Rating, Relationship Development

UNIT 5 TQM TOOLS 12 Hrs.

Juran Trilogy, Plan-do-study-act (PDSA) Cycle, 5S, Kaizen, Benchmarking – Reasons to Benchmark,

Benchmarking Process, Quality Function Deployment (QFD) – House of Quality, QFD Process, Benefits, Taguchi Quality

Loss Function, Total Productive Maintenance (TPM) – Concept, Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA) – Stages of

FMEA.

Max. 60 Hours


1. James R.Evans and William M.Lidsay, The Management and Control of Quality, (5th

Edition), Learning), 2002

2. Feigenbaum. A.V, “Total Quality Management, McGraw-Hill, 1991.

3. Oakland.J.S. “Total Quality Management Butterworth – Hcinemann Ltd., Oxford. 1989.

4. Zeiri. “Total Quality Management for Engineers Wood Head Publishers, 1991.

5. Sharma S.C., Inspection, Quality control and Reliability- Khanna Publishers, 1998.

6. Srinath L.S., Reliability Engineering – Affiliated East West Press, 1975.

7. Sinha S.K and Kale B.K.,"Life Testing and Reliability Estimation", Wiely Eastern Ltd., 2008


Marks : 100


PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 14 Marks.

South-Western (Thomson

Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

30 Marks

70 Marks


SPR5616 THEORY OF METAL CUTTING L T P Credits Total.Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To understand the concept and basics of metal cutting processes and cutting force developed in metal cutting.

To enable the students to understand the single and multipoint cutting tools, tool life, tool wear and thermal aspects in metal cutting.

UNIT 1 MECHANICS OF METAL CUTTING 12 Hrs. Machining - fundamentals of machining - Different types of motions to generate different shapes -mechanism of

metal cutting - chip formation - chip thickness ratio - radius of chip curvature - cutting speed - feed and depth of cut types of chips and chip breakers. Orthogonal and oblique cutting processes- principles and differences – theoretical analysis of cutting force - Merchant's circle analysis - variables affecting machining process- effect of speed, feed rate and depth of cut on force in machining processes -power consumed – metal removal rate - force measurement using dynamometers for lathe, drilling, milling - calibration of dynamometers. UNIT 2 CUTTING TOOL 12 Hrs.

Types of cutting tool – American standards association (ASA), Orthogonal rake system (ORS) and Normal rake system (NRS) - conversion from one system to others - Single point cutting tool geometry and their inter-relation - various systems of specifications - theories of formation of built-up edge and their effect - Multipoint cutting tools – types of drills - twist drill geometry - types of milling cutters and their geometry - machining time calculations – Mechanism of grinding - Specifications of grinding wheel - effect of grinding conditions on wheel wear and grinding ratio UNIT 3 TOOL MATERIAL AND TOOL LIFE 12 Hrs.

Types of cutting tool – American standards association (ASA), Orthogonal rake system (ORS) and Normal rake system (NRS) - conversion from one system to others - Single point cutting tool geometry and their inter-relation - various systems of specifications - theories of formation of built-up edge and their effect - Multipoint cutting tools – types of drills - twist drill geometry - types of milling cutters and their geometry - machining time calculations – Mechanism of grinding - Specifications of grinding wheel - effect of grinding conditions on wheel wear and grinding ratio UNIT 4 MECHANISM OF TOOL WEAR 12 Hrs.

Reasons for failure of cutting tools - Theories of tool wear - Mechanism of wear - adhesion, abrasive and diffusion wear - forms of wear – crater and flank wear - Chatter in machining - mechanism of chatter - types of chatter - factors effecting chatter in machining - Types of sliding contact - real area of contact - laws of friction and nature of frictional force in metal cutting - effect of tool angle.

UNIT 5 THERMAL ASPECTS IN METAL CUTTING, CUTTING FLUIDS AND SURFACE ROUGHNESS12 Hrs. Sources of heat in metal cutting - Heat distribution in machining - Effects of various parameters on temperature

- methods of temperature measurement - methods of controlling cutting temperature - Hot machining - Cutting fluids - functions of cutting fluids, types of cutting fluids, properties, selection of cutting fluids – application of cutting fluids - surface roughness - measurement of surface roughness - modification of tool geometries for improved surface finish - effect of process variables on surface roughness. Max. 60 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. SHAW .M.C, "Metal cutting Principles”, Oxford Clarendon Press, 1984. 2. BHATTACHARYA, "Metal Cutting Theory and Practice", New central Book Agency(p) Ltd.,Calcutta1984. 3. VENKATESH .V.C and CHANDRASEKHARAN.H, “Experimental Techniques in Metal cutting ", Prentice Hall of India, 1982. 4. KUPPUSWAMY.G, “Principles of metal cutting ", Universities Press (India) Ltd., 1996. 5. JUNEJA.B.L and SEKHON.G.S, “Fundamentals of metal cutting and machine tools ", New Age International (p) Ltd., 1991



SPR5617 INDUSTRIAL ERGONOMICS L T P Credits Total.Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To impart knowledge in the area of ergonomics and its application in manufacturing.

To study the fundamentals of work station problems using risk assessment tools.


Concepts of human factors engineering and ergonomics – Man – machine system and design philosophy – Physical

work – Heat stress – manual lifting – work posture – repetitive motion.

.UNIT 2 ANTHROPOMETRY 12 Hrs.

Physical dimensions of the human body as a working machine – Motion size relationships – Static and dynamic

anthropometry – Anthropometric aids – Design principles – Using anthropometric measures for industrial design –

Procedure for anthropometric design.

UNIT 3 DESIGN OF SYSTEMS 12 Hrs.

Displays – Controls – Workplace – Seating – Work process – Duration and rest periods – Hand tool design – Design of

visual displays – Design for shift work.

UNIT 4 ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS IN DESIGN 12 Hrs.

Temperature – Humidity – Noise – Illumination –Vibration – Measurement of illumination and contrast – use of

photometers – Recommended illumination levels. The ageing eye – Use of indirect (reflected) lighting – cost efficiency of

illumination – special purpose lighting for inspection and quality control – Measurement of sound – Noise exposure and

hearing loss – Hearing protectors – analysis and reduction of noise – Effects of Noise on performance – annoyance of

noise and interference with communication – sources of vibration discomfort.

UNIT 5 WORK PHYSIOLOGY 12 Hrs.

Provision of energy for muscular work – Role of oxygen physical exertion – Measurement of energy expenditure

Respiration – Pulse rate and blood pressure during physical work – Physical work capacity and its evaluation.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Martin Helander, A guide to the ergonomics of manufacturing, East West press, 1996

2. McCormic, E.J. Human factors in engineering design, McGraw Hill 1976

3. Bridger, R.S. Introduction to Ergonomics, McGraw Hill, 1995.






SPR5618 FINITE ELEMENT APPLICATION IN L T P Credits Total.Marks

MANUFACTURING 4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To impart knowledge in the area of finite element methods and its application in manufacturing.

To study the fundamentals of one dimensional and two dimensional problems using FEA in manufacturing.


Fundamentals of FEM-basic steps involved ib FEM – Initial, boundary and eigen value problems – weighted residual, Galerkin and Rayleigh Ritz methods - Integration by parts – Basics of variational formulation – Polynomial and Nodal approximation.

UNIT 2 ONE DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS 12 Hrs.

Discretization. Interpolation, derivation of elements characteristic matrix, shape function, ass embly and imposition of boundary conditions-solution and post processing – One dimensional analysis in solid mechanics and heat transfer.

UNIT 3: TWO DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS 12 Hrs.

Shape functions for two dimensional elements- Three noded triangular and four nodded quadrilateral element Global and natural co-ordinates-Heat transfer problems—Non linear analysis – Isoperimetric elements – Jacobian matrices and transformations – Basics of two dimensional, plane stress, plane strain and axisymmetric analysis.

UNIT 4 COMPUTER IMPLEMENTATION IN FEM 12 Hrs.

Pre Processing, mesh generation, elements connecting, boundary conditions, input of material and processing characteristics – Solution and post processing – Overview of application packages – Simple problems in one dimensional analysis and validation.

UNIT 5 FEM APPLICATIONS IN MANUFACTURING PROCESS 12 Hrs.

FE analysis of metal casting – special considerations, latent heat incorporation, gap element – Time stepping procedures – Crank – Nicholson algorithm – Prediction of grain structure – Basic concepts of plasticity and fracture – Solid and flow formulation – FE analysis of metal cutting, chip separation criteria, incorporation of strain rate dependency.

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Reddy, J.N. An Introduction to the Finite Element Method, McGraw Hill,2005.

2. Rao, S.S., Finite Element method in engineering, Pergammon press, 2005.

3. Seshu P., Textbook of Finite Element Analysis, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, 2004.

4. Lewis R.W. Morgan, K, Thomas, H.R. and Seetharaman, K.N. The Finite Element Method in Heat Transfer Analysis, John Wiley, 1994.

5. Bathe, K.J., Finite Element procedures in Engineering Analysis, 1990

6. Kobayashi,S, Soo-ik-Oh and Altan,T, Metal Forming and the Finite Element Methods, Oxford University Press,1989.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 6 Questions of 5 Marks each uniformly distributed among all units – No Choice 30 Marks



SPR5619 LEAN MANUFACTURING L T P Credits Max.Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To enable the student to understand the lean manufacturing components

To present the underlying principles of lean manufacturing systems design

x To provide the student with the opportunity to relate lean manufacturing application with others

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION 12 Hrs. Objectives of lean manufacturing-key principles and implications of lean manufacturing- traditional Vs lean manufacturing.

UNIT 2 LEAN MANUFACTURING CONCEPTS 12 Hrs. Value creation and waste elimination- main kinds of waste- pull production-different models of pull production-continuous flow-continuous improvement / Kaizen- worker involvement -cellular layout- administrative lean.

UNIT 3 LEAN MANUFACTURING TOOLS AND METHODOLOGIES 12 Hrs.

Standard work -communication of standard work to employees -standard work and flexibility -visual controls-quality at the source- 5S principles -preventative maintenance-total quality management-total productive maintenance -changeover/setup time -batch size reduction -production leveling.

UNIT 4 VALUE STREAM MAPPING 12 Hrs. The as-is diagram-the future state map-application to the factory simulation scenario-line balancing -Poke Yoke -Kanban – overall equipment effectiveness.

UNIT 5 JUST IN TIME MANUFACTURING 12 Hrs. Introduction - elements of JIT - uniform production rate - pull versus push method- Kanban system - small lot size - quick, inexpensive set-up - continuous improvement. Optimised production technology

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Askin R G and Goldberg J B, “Design and Analysis of Lean Production Systems”, John Wiley and Sons Inc., 2003.

2. Michael L George, David T Rowlands, Bill Kastle, “What is Lean Six Sigma”, McGraw Hill, New York, 2004.

3. Micheal Wader, “Lean Tools: A Pocket Guide to Implementing Lean Practices”, Productivity and Quality Publishing Pvt Ltd,

2002.

4. Kenichi Sekine, “One-Piece Flow”, Productivity Press, Portland, Oregon, 1992.

5. Alan Robinson “Continuous Improvement in Operations”, Productivity Press, Portland, Oregon, 1991.





SPR5620 INTELLIGENT PRODUCT DESIGN AND L T P Credits Total.Marks

MANUFACTURING 4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

• To impart knowledge on intelligent product design and manufacturing, optimization algorithms, implementation of Manufacturing

Performance Measurements


Basic concepts of Artificial intelligence and expert systems - System Components – System architecture and Data flow – System

Operations

UNIT 2 KNOWLEDGE BASED SYSTEM 12 Hrs.

Knowledge based systems - knowledge representation – knowledge acquisition and optimization - Knowledge based approaches to

design mechanical parts and mechanisms and design for automated assembly Knowledge based system for material selection – Intelligent

process planning system.

UNIT3 KNOWLEDGE REPRESENTATION TECHNIQUES 12 Hrs.

Artificial Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic, Genetic Algorithms, Simulated Annealing, Expert Systems with case studies.

UNIT 4 INTELLIGENT SYSTEM 12 Hrs.

Intelligent system for equipment selection - Intelligent system for project m a n a g em en t & factory monitoring. Scheduling in

manufacturing – scheduling the shop floor – Diagnosis & trouble shooting.

UNIT 5 INTELLIGENT PRODUCT MODELING TECHNIQUES 12 Hrs.

Intelligent CAD systems, integrating product and process design, manufacturing analysis and CAD/CAM integration, design

methodology for automated manufacture, the impacts of intelligent process control on product design, and fuzzy knowledge base d controller

design

Max. 60 Hours


1. Andrew Kussiak,, “Intelligent Manufacturing Systems”, Prentice Hall , 1990.

2. Simons, G.L, “Introducing Artificial Intelligence”, NCC Pub, 1990.

3. Rich,E., “Artificial Intelligence”, Mc Graw Hill, 1986.

4. Huang, G.Q. and Mak, K.L., “Internet Applications in Product design and Manufacturing”, Springer, 2003.

5. Parsaei, H.R. and Jamshidi, M., “Design and implementation of intelligent manufacturing systems”, Prentics Hall, 1995.

6. Kusiak, A., “Intelligent Design and Manufacturing”, Wiley-Interscience, 1992.

7. Dagli, C.H., “Intelligent systems in design and manufacturing”, ASME, 1994.





SPR5621

MEMS AND NANO MATERIALS L T P Credits Total.Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE O B J E C T I V E S

To understand the various MEMS and Nano Material Concept

To provide an importance of MEMS and its application in manufacturing systems that prepare students for their engineering practice

UNIT 1 OVER VIEW OF MEMS AND MICROSYSTEMS 12 Hrs. Definition – historical development – fundamentals – properties, micro fluidics, design and fabrication micro-system, microelectronics, working principle and applications of micro system.

UNIT 2 MATERIALS, FABRICATION P R O C E S S E S AND MICRO SYSTEM PACKAGING 12 Hrs.

Substrates and wafers, silicon as substrate material, mechanical properties of Si, Silicon Compounds silicon piezo resistors, Galium arsenide, quartz, polymers for MEMS, conductive polymers. Photolithography, photo resist applications, light sources, in implantation, diffusion process exudation – thermal oxidation, silicon diode, chemical vapour deposition, sputtering - deposition by epitoxy – etching – bulk and surface machining – LIGA process Micro system packaging – considerations packaging – levels of micro system packaging die level, device level and system level.

UNIT 3 MICRO D E V I C E S AND MATERIALS 12 Hrs.

Sensors – classification – signal conversion ideal characterization of sensors micro actuators, mechanical sensors – measurands displacement sensors, pressure and flow sensors, micro actuators – smart materials – applications.

UNIT 4 S C I E N C E OF NANO MATERIALS 12 Hrs.

Classification of nano structures – effect of the nanometer length scale effects of nano scale dimensions on various properties – structural, thermal, chemical, mechanical, magnetic, optical and electronic properties – effect of nanoscale dimensions on biological systems. Fabrication methods – Top down processes – bottom up process.

UNIT 5 CHARACTERIZATION OF NANO MATERIALS 12 Hrs.

Nano-processing systems – Nano measuring systems – characterization – analytical imaging techniques – microscopy techniques, electron microscopy scanning electron microscopy, transmission electron microscopy, transmission electron microscopy, scanning tunneling microscopy, atomic force microscopy, diffraction techniques – spectroscopy techniques – Raman spectroscopy, 3D surface analysis – Mechanical, Magnetic and thermal properties – Nano positioning systems.

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT / R E F E R E N C E BOOKS 1. Tai – Ran Hsu, MEMS and Microsystems Design and Manufacture, Tata-McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2002.

2. Mark Madou Fundamentals of Microfabrication, CRC Press, New York, 1997.

3. Norio Taniguchi, Nano Technology, Oxford University Press, New York, 2003

4. The MEMS Hand book, Mohamed Gad-el-Hak, CRC Press, New York, London.

5. Charles P Poole, Frank J Owens, Introduction to Nano technology, John Wiley and Sons, 2003

6. Julian W. Hardner Micro Sensors, Principles and Applications, CRC Press 1993.

END S E M E S T E R EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN




SPR5622 MANUFACTURING SYSTEM SIMULATION L T P Credits Total.Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To study about random numbers, simulation experiments, simulation language and case studies


Basic concepts of system – elements of manufacturing system - concept of simulation – simulation as a decision making tool – types of simulation – Monte-Carlo simulation - system modeling – types of modeling – Limitations and Areas of application of simulation.

UNIT 2 RANDOM NUMBERS 12 Hrs.

Probability and statistical concepts of simulation – Pseudo random numbers – methods of generating random numbers – discrete and continuous distribution – testing of random numbers – kolmogorov-Smirnov test, the Chi-Square test - sampling - simple, random and simulated

UNIT 3 DESIGN OF SIMULATION EXPERIMENTS 12 Hrs.

Problem formulation – data collection and reduction – time flow mechanical – key variables - logic flow chart starting condition – run size – experimental design consideration – output analysis, interpretation and validation – application of simulation in engineering industry.

UNIT 4 SIMULATION LANGUAGE 12 Hrs. Comparison and selection of simulation languages - Study of GPSS (Basic blocks only) Generate, Queue, Depart, Size, Release, Advance, Terminate, Transfer, Enter and Leave.

UNIT 5 CASE STUDIES 12 Hrs. Development of simulation models using GPSS for queuing, production, inventory, maintenance and replacement systems – case studies.

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Jerry Banks and John S.Carson, “Discrete event system simulation”, Prentice Hall 1991

2. John H.Mize and J.Grady Cox, “Essentials of simulation” – Prentice hall 1989.

3. Geoffrey Gordon “System simulation” – Prentice Hall of India, 1992

4. Jeffrey L.Written, Lonnie D, Bentley and V.M. Barice, “System analysis and Design Methods”, Galgotia publication, 1995

5. Averill M.Law and W.David Kelton, “Simulation Modeling and analysis”, McGraw Hill International Editions, 1991




SPR5601 ADVANCED I.C. ENGINES L T P Credits Total.Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To study thermodynamics of I.C. Engines

To study the combustion in SI and CI engines

To Study pollution formation and control methods in I.C. engines


Historical Review – Engine Types – Design and operating Parameters. Cycle Analysis: Thermo-chemistry of

Fuel – Air mixtures, properties – Ideal Models of Engine cycles – Real Engine cycles - differences and Factors

responsible for – Computer Modeling.

UNIT 2 GAS EXCHANGE PROCESSES 12 Hrs.

Volumetric Efficiency – Flow through ports – Supercharging and Turbo charging. Charge Motion: Mean velocity and

Turbulent characteristics – Swirl, Squish – Pre-chamber Engine flows.

UNIT 3 ENGINE COMBUSTION IN S.I ENGINES 12 Hrs.

Combustion and Speed – Cyclic Variations – Ignition – Abnormal combustion Fuel factors, MPFI, SI engine

testing. Combustion in CI engines: Essential Features – Types of Cycle. Pr. Data – Fuel Spray Behavior – Ignition

Delay – Mixing Formation and control, Common rail fuel injection system.

UNIT 4 POLLUTANT FORMATION AND CONTROL 12 Hrs.

Nature and extent of problems – Nitrogen Oxides, Carbon monoxide, unburnt Hydrocarbon and particulate –

Emissions – Measurement – Exhaust Gas Treatment, Catalytic converter, SCR, Particulate Traps, Lean, NOx,

Catalysts.

UNIT 5 ENGINE HEAT TRANSFER 12 Hrs.

Importance of heat transfer, heat transfer and engine energy balance, Convective heat transfer , radiation heat

transfer, Engine operating characteristics. Fuel supply systems for S.I. and C.I engines to use gaseous fuels like LPG,

CNG and Hydrogen. Modern Trends in IC Engines: Lean Burning and Adiabatic concepts, Rotary Engines, Modification

in I.C engines to suit Bio – fuels, HCCI and GDI concepts.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Heinz Heisler, Advanced Engine Technology, S.A.E. Publications 1995

2. Tom Denton, Automotive Electrical & Electronic systems, Edward Arnold1995.

3. Duffy smith, Auto Fuel systems, The god heart Wilcox company Inc. Publishers 1987.

4. Gordon P.Blair, Advanced concepts of Two stroke Engines S.A.E.1990.

5. John B.Heywood, Internal combustion Engine Fundamentals, McGraw Hill Book 1990.






SME5602 ADVANCED REFRIGERATION AND AIR L T P Credits Total.Marks

CONDITIONING 4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To study vapour compression refrigeration system

To study the thermal comfort of air conditioning

To study the various air conditioning systems

UNIT 1 VAPOUR COMPRESSION REFRIGERATION 12 Hrs. Performance of Complete vapour compression system. Components of Vapour Compression System: The

condensing unit – Evaporators – Expansion valve – Ref rigerants – Properties – ODP & GWP - Load balancing of vapor compression Unit. Compound Compression: Flash inter-cooling – flash chamber – Multi-evaporator & Multistage systems.

UNIT 2 THERMAL COMFORT 12 Hrs. Thermal comfort, Heat transfer from human body, metabolic heat generation, effect of clothing and definition of

effective temperature, PMV and PPP, ASHRAE comfort chart, Infiltration and ventilation, Indoor air quality, sources of indoor pollution, methods of control for IAQ, Fresh air requirements for IAQ

UNIT 3 PSYCHROMETRY 12 Hrs. Composition of moist air, psychrometric properties ,Ideal adiabatic saturation temperature, Relationbetween WBT

and Thermodynamic WBT, Relation between psychrometric properties, psychrometric chart, ASHARE,psychrometric chart, psychrometric processes, Air washer ,Bypass factor, ADP, applied psychrometry - RSHF,GSHF and ESHF.

UNIT 4 AIR CONDITIONING: 12 Hrs. Requirements of Comfort Air –conditioning – Thermodynamics of human body – Summer , Winter and year round

air – conditioning systems. Cooling load Estimation: Occupants, equipments, infiltration, duet heat gain fan load, Fresh air load. Duct Systems- Frictional pressure drop in straight ducts, rectangular, circular cross section, equivalent diameter for rectangular ducts, pressure losses in fittings-due to sudden enlargement, contraction, duct sizing, velocity reduction method (VRM),Equal friction method (EFM), static regain method, Selection of fans, fan laws, fan characteristic curves, air distribution in rooms

UNIT 5 AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS 12 Hrs. All air system, All water system Air water system, Direct Refrigerant, Unitary system, Chilled ceiling and chilled

beams, VAV, VRF, water cooled VRV. Two stage evaporating cooling, RA&C Control system-Closed & open loop control system, control based on air space temperature, outside temperature, heating and cooling medium, humidity and all parameters, Application - Super market s, restaurants, kitchen exhaust, ventilation system and official buildings

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Dossat R.J., Principles of refrigerations, John Wiley, 1984. 2. Stoecker, W.F. Refrigeration and Air conditioning, McGraw Hill Book Company, 1985. 3. Jorden and Priester, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning, 1985. 4. Goshnay W.B., Principles and Rerigeration, Cambridge, University Press, 1982. 5. Langley, Billy, C.,‘Solid State Electronic Controls for HV ACR, pentice-Hall 1989.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 PART A : 6 Questions of 5 Marks each uniformly distributed among all units – No Choice PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 14 Marks.

Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. 30 Marks 70 Marks


SME5603 AIRCRAFT AND SPACE PROPULSION L T P Credits Total.Marks

4 0 0 4 100 COURSE OBJECTIVES

To study the jet propulsion system

To study the various characteristic parameters involved in nozzle To Study the solid and liquid propellant characteristics

UNIT 1 PRINCIPLES OF JET PROPULSION AND ROCKETRY 12 Hrs. Fundamentals of jet propulsion, Rockets and air breathing jet engines – Classification – turbo jet , turbo fan,

turbo prop, rocket (Solid and Liquid propellant rockets) and Ramjet engines. Nozzle Theory and Characteristics Parameters: Theory of one dimensional convergent – divergent nozzles – aerodynamic choking of nozzles and mass flow through a nozzle – nozzle exhaust velocity –thrust, thrust coefficient, Ac / At of a nozzle, Supersonic nozzle shape, non-adapted nozzles, summer field criteria, departure from simple analysis – characteristic parameters – 1) characteristic velocity, 2)specific impulse 3) total impulse 4) Relationship between the characteristic parameters 5) nozzle efficiency, combustion efficiency and overall efficiency. UNIT 2 AERO THERMO CHEMISTRY OF THE COMBUSTION PRODUCTS 12 Hrs.

Review of properties of mixture of gases – Gibbs – Dalton laws –Equivalent ratio, enthalpy changes in reactions, heat of reaction and heat of formation – calculation of adiabatic flame temperature and specific impulse – frozen and equilibrium flows.

Solid Propulsion System: Solid propellants – classification, homogeneous and heterogeneous propellants, double base propellant compositions and manufacturing methods. Composite propellant oxidizers and binders. Effect of binder on propellant properties. Burning rate and burning rate laws, factors influencing the burning rate, methods of determining burning rates.

UNIT 3 PROPULSION SYSTEM 12 Hrs. Solid propellant rocket engine – internal ballistics, equilibrium motor operation and equilibrium pressure to

various parameters. Transient and pseudo equilibrium operation, end burning and burning grains, grain design. Rocket motor hard ware design. Heat transfer considerations in solid rocket motor design. Ignition system, simple pyro devices Liquid Rocket Propulsion System: Liquid propellants – classification, Mono and Bi propellants, Cryogenic and storage propellants, ignition delay of hypergolic propellants, physical and chemical characteristics of liquid propellant. Liquid propellant rocket engine – system layout, pump and pressure feed systems, feed system components. Design of combustion chamber, characteristic length, constructional features, and chamber wall stresses. Heat transfer and cooling aspects. Uncooled engines, injectors – various types, injection patterns, injector characteristics, and atomization and drop size distribution, propellant tank design. UNIT 4 TURBO JET PROPULSION SYSTEM 12 Hrs.

Gas turbine cycle analysis –layout of turbo jet engine. Turbo machinery- compressors and turbines, combustor, blade aerodynamics, engine off design performance analysis.Flight Performance: Forces acting on vehicle – Basic relations of motion – multi stage vehicles.

UNIT 5 RAMJET AND INTEGRAL ROCKET RAMJET PROPULSION SYSTEM 12 Hrs. Fuel rich solid propellants, gross thrust, gross thrust coefficient, combustion efficiency of ramjet engine, air

intakes and their classification – critical, super critical and sub-critical operation of air intakes, engine intake matching, classification and comparison of IIRR propulsion systems.

Max. 60 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Hill and Peterson, Mechanics and Dynamics of Propulsion,7th edition, John Wiley& Sons. 2001 2. George P.Sutton, Rocket propulsion elements, 8th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2010 3. Ganesan, Gas Turbines, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2003 4. Khajuria & Dubey, Gas Turbines & Propulsive Systems, Dhanpat Rai & Sons Bevere, Rocket propulsion



SME5604 CRYOGENIC ENGINEERING L T P Credits Total.Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

• To learn the fundamentals of cryogenic Engineering, Cryogenic systems their working and applications.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO UNIT I CRYOGENIC SYSTEMS 12 Hrs.

Mechanical Properties at low temperatures. Properties of Cryogenic Fluids. Gas Liquefaction: Minimum work

for liquefaction. Methods to protect low temperature. Liquefaction systems for gases other than Neon. Hydrogen and

Helium. Space technology, In-Flight air separation and collection of LOX, Gas industry, Biology, Medicine, Electronics.

UNIT 2 LIQUEFACTION SYSTEMS FOR NEON, HYDROGEN AND HELIUM 12 Hrs.

Components of Liquefaction systems. Heat exchangers. Compressors and expanders. Expansion valve, Losses i n

real machines.

UNIT-3 GAS SEPARATION AND PURIFICATION SYSTEMS 12 Hrs.

Properties of mixtures, Principles of mixtures, Principles of gas separation, Air separation systems.

UNIT- 4 CRYOGENIC REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS 12 Hrs.

Refrigerators using solids as working media- Magnetic cooling, magnetic refrigeration systems, thermal;

valves, nuclear demagnetization, Liquids, and Gases, Adsorption processes- Physical principles of adsorption,

Adsorbents-various adsorbents, salient features – properties, determination of mass of absorbents for the adsorption of

gases.

UNIT-5 CRYOGENIC STORAGE AND INSTRUMENTATION 12 Hrs.

Cryogenic fluid storage & transfer, Cryogenic storage systems, Insulation, Fluid transfer mechanisms,

Cryostat, Cryo Coolers Cryogenic storage- Dewar, construction of Dewar, fluid storage and transfer, different piping

methods, insulating types, vapor shielded vessels. Vacuum technology-definition, different flow regimes, need of

vacuum in cryogenics, types of vacuum, pump down time, types of vacuum pumps-mechanical pump, diffusion pump,

ion pump, baffles and loops, types of vacuum gauges and operating range.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Barren, R.F. Cryogenic Systems, Oxford University Press

2. Marshal Sitting and Von Nostrand , Cryogenic Research and Applications , Inc. New Jersey

3. Scottm, R.B. Vin Nostrand, Cryogenic Engineering, Inc. New Jersey, 1959

4. White, O.K. Experimental Techniques in Low Temperature Physics, Oxford Press, 1968.

5. Timmerhaus K.D. & Flynn TM, Cryogenic Process Engineering, Plenum Press, 1998

6. Weisend –II J.G., Hand Book of Cryogenic Engineering , Taylor and Francis, 1998






SME5605 DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF TURBO MACHINES L T P Credits Total.Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To learn the fundamental Theory of Turbo Machines and their classifications

To study the various Turbo machines, their working and performance

UNIT 1 THEORY OF TURBO MACHINES 12 Hrs. Introduction – Classification of Turbomachinery – Energy transfer between a fluid and a Rotor – Euler Turbine equation – Components of energy transfer – Internal and external losses – Efficiencies.

UNIT 2 TYPES OF TUBINES

Impulse and Reaction turbine – degree of reaction –Utilisation factor – Speed ratio.

12 Hrs.

UNIT 3 FUNDAMENTALS OF FLUID FLOW 12 Hrs.

Flow of fluid through rotor blades – One and two dimensional incompressible flow analysis –Calculation of velocity and pressure – Radial pressure gradient – Free vortex flow – Forced vortex flow. Two dimensional cascades – Experimental study – Correlations, Ainley, Soderberg, Howell’s

UNIT 4 FANS BLOWERS AND PUMPS 12 Hrs.

Fans, Blowers and Pumps: Radial and axial flow – single and multistage flow through impeller –Design parameters- Selection of empirical and experimental data for design – Performance characteristics, Stability of operation.

UNIT 5 STEAM TURBINES 12 Hrs. Types – Design of impulse and Reaction stages – 50 percent reaction steam turbine – Blade and nozzle losses – efficiencies – Reheat factor.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Dr. Yahya S.M., Turbomachines, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1998.

2. Shepherd D.G., Principles of Turbomachines, Macmillan, London, 1968.

3. Dr. Yahya S.M., Turbines, Compressors and Fans, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 1998.

4. Keartow W.O., Steam Turbine theory and practice, ELBS, London, 1995.

5. Jagdishlal and Church A.M., Centrifugal pumps and blowers, Metropolitan Book Company, 1988.





SME5606 DESIGN OF HEAT EXCHANGERS L T P Credits Total.Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

• To learn the Design principles of various Heat Exchangers

UNIT 1 CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS AND HEAT TRANSFER 12 Hrs. Types - Shell and Tube Heat Exchangers – Regenerators and Recuperators - Industrial Applications Temperature Distribution and its Implications - LMTD - Effectiveness – NTU method.

UNIT 2 FLOW DISTRIBUTION AND STRESS ANALYSIS 12 Hrs. Effect of Turbulence - Friction Factor - Pressure Loss – Channel Divergence Stresses in Tubes - Heater Sheets and Pressure Vessels - Thermal Stresses - Shear Stresses - Types of Failures, Flow induced vibrations.

UNIT 3 DESIGN ASPECTS 12 Hrs. Heat Transfer and Pressure Loss - Flow Configuration - Effect of Baffles - Effect of Deviations from Ideality - Design of Typical Liquid - Gas-Gas-Liquid Heat Exchangers

UNIT 4 CONDENSERS AND EVAPORATORS DESIGN

Design of Surface and Evaporative Condensers - Design of Shell and Tube - Plate Type Evaporators 12 Hrs.

UNIT 5 COOLING TOWERS 12 Hrs.

Types – counter flow – cross flow - Packings - Spray Design - Selection of Pumps - Fans and Pipes - Testing and Maintenance - Experimental Methods – Types of draft – natural and forced.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Taborek, T. Hewitt, G.F. and Afgan, N. Heat Exchangers, Theory and Practice, McGraw Hill Book Company, 1980

2. Walker, Industrial Heat Exchangers - A Basic Guide, McGraw Hill Book Co., 1980

3. Nicholas Cheremisioff, Cooling Tower, Ann Arbor Science Pub 1981

4. Arthur P.Fraas, Heat Exchanger Design, John Wiley & Sons, 1988

5. Kern D.Q., Process Heat transfer, Tata McGraw -Hill, New Delhi, 1999.




SME5607

ENERGY MANAGEMENT IN THERMAL SYSTEMS

L T P Credits Total.Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To learn the present energy scenario and the need for energy conservation To learn the instruments suitable for energy auditing

To study the various measures for energy conservation and financial implications for various thermal utilities


Energy Scenario – world and India. Energy Resources Availability in India. Energy consumption pattern. Energy conservation potential in various Industries and commercial establishments. Energy intensive industries – an overview. Energy conservation and energy efficiency – needs and advantages. Energy auditing – types, methodologies, barriers. Role of energy manager – Energy audit questionnaire – energy Conservation Act 2003.

UNIT 2 INSTRUMENTS FOR ENERGY 12 Hrs.

Instrument characteristics – sensitivity, readability, accuracy, precision, hystersis. Error and calibration. Measurement of flow, velocity, pressure, temperature, speed, Lux, power and humidity. Analysis of stack, water quality, power and fuel quality.

UNIT 3 THERMAL UTILITIES: OPERATION AND ENERGY CONSERVARTION 12 Hrs.

(i) Boilers (ii) Thermic Fluid Heaters (iii) Furnaces (iv) Waste Heat Recovery Systems (v) Thermal Storage

UNIT 4 THERMAL ENERGY TRANSMISSION / PROTECTION SYSTEMS 12 Hrs. Steam traps – ref ractories – optimum insulation thickness – insulation – piping design

UNIT 5 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT 12 Hrs.

Investment – need, appraisal and criteria, financial analysis techniques – break even analysis –simple pay back period, return on investment, net present value, internal rate of return, cash flows,DSCR, financing options, ESCO concept.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Smith, CB Energy Management Principles, Pergamon Press, NewYork, 1981

2. Hamies, Energy Auditing and Conservation; Methods Measurements, Management and Case study, Hemisphere, Washington, 1980

3. Trivedi, PR, Jolka KR, Energy Management, Commonwealth Publication, New Delhi, 1997

4. Write, Larry C, Industrial Energy Management and Utilization, Hemisphere Publishers, Washington,1988

5. Diamant, RME, Total Energy, Pergamon, Oxford, 1970

6. Handbook on Energy Efficiency, TERI, New Delhi, 2001

7 Guide book for National Certification Examination for Energy Managers and Energy Auditors





SME5608 EXPERIMENTAL METHODS IN THERMAL POWER L T P Credits Total.Marks

ENGINEERING 4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES • To enhance the knowledge of the students about various measuring instruments, techniques and importance of

error and uncertainty analysis.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION 12 Hrs. Basic concepts of measurement methods, single and multi point measurement Min space and time. Processing

of experimental data, curve fitting and regression analysis. Data Acquisition systems: Fundamentals of digital signals and their transmission, A/D-and D/A converters, Basic components of data acquisition system. Computer interfacing of digital instrument and data acquisition systems; Digital multiplexes, Data acquisition board (DAQ), Digital image processing fundamentals. Design and Construction of Experimental facilities: wind tunnel, general test rigs, Rest cells for flow visualization and temperature mapping.

UNIT 2 MODELING AND SIMULATION OF MEASUREMENT SYSTEM 12 Hrs. Lumped analysis, first order and second order systems: Frequency response and time constant calculation.

Response of a generalized instrument to random data input, FFT analysis. Temperature Measurement: Measurement Design, Construction and Analysis of liquid and gas thermometers, resistance thermometer with wheat stone bridge, Thermo-electric effect, Construction, testing and calibration of thermocouples and thermopiles, Analysis of effect of bead size and shielding on time constant and frequency response, characteristics of thermocouple, pyrometers, radiation thermometers.

UNIT 3 INTERFEROMETRY & HUMIDITY MEASUREMENT / FLOW AND VELOCITY MEASUREMENT 12 Hrs.. Interferometers, Humidity measurement: Conventional methods, electrical transducers, Dunmox humidity and

microprocessor based dew point instrument, Calibration of humidity sensors. Flow and Velocity Measurement: industrial flow measuring devices, design, selection and calibration, velocity measurements, pitot tubes, yaw tubes, pitot static tubes; frequency response and time constant calculation. Hot-wire anemometer; 2d/3d flow measurement and turbulence measurement, Laser application in flow measurement, Flow visualization techniques, Combustion photography.

UNIT 4 MEASUREMENT OF PRESSURE, FORCE, AND TORQUE 12 Hrs. Analysis of liquid manometer, dynamics of variable area and inclined manometer, Pressure transducers, Speed and torque measurement: rotor speed and torque measurement of rotating system.

UNIT 5 AIR POLLUTION SAMPLING AND MEASUREMENT 12 Hrs. Units for pollution measurement, gas sampling techniques, particulate sampling technique, gas chromatography.

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Holman, J.P. Experimental Methods for Engineers,7th edition, McGraw-Hill Publications, 2007 2. Monomery, D.C. Design and Analysis of Experiments, John Wiley and sons, 1984. 3. Nicolo Balavendram, Quality by design: Taguchi techniques for Industrial Experimentation., Prentice Hall, 1995. 4. Beckwith M.G., Marangoni R.D. and Lienhard J.H., Mechanical Measurements , Pearson Education. 5. Doebelin, E.O. Measurements systems-Application and Design,Tata McGraw-Hill Publications.



SME5609 FLUIDIZED BED SYSTEMS L T P Credits Total.Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To introduce the concepts of fluidization and heat transfer in fluidized beds.

To understand the design principles and apply the same for industrial applications.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION 12 Hrs. Necessity of thermal storage – types-energy storage devices – comparison of energy storage technologies - seasonal thermal energy storage - storage materials.

UNIT 2 SENSIBLE HEAT STORAGE SYSTEM 12 Hrs. Basic concepts and modeling of heat storage units - modeling of simple water and rock bed storage system – use of TRNSYS – pressurized water storage system for power plant applications – packed beds.

UNIT 3 REGENERATORS 12 Hrs.

Parallel flow and counter flow regenerators – finite conductivity model – non – linear model – transient performance – step changes in inlet gas temperature – step changes in gas flow rate –parameterization of transient response – heat storage exchangers.

UNIT 4 LATENT HEAT STORAGE SYSTEMS 12 Hrs. Modeling of phase change problems – temperature based model - enthalpy model - porous medium approach – conduction dominated phase change – convection dominated phase change.

UNIT 5 APPLICATIONS 12 Hrs. Specific areas of application of energy storage – food preservation – waste heat recovery – solar energy storage – green house heating – power plant applications – drying and heating for process industries.

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Howard,J.R., Fluidized Bed Technology: Principles and Applications, Adam Hilger, NewYork,1983.

2. Geldart, D., Gas Fluidization Technology, John Willey and Sons, 1986.

3. Kunii, D and Levespiel, O., Fluidization Engineering, John Wiley and Son Inc, New York,1 969.

4. Howard, J.R. (Ed), Fluidized Beds: Combustion and Applications, Applied Science Publishers,New York, 1983.

5. Botteril, J.S.M., Fluid Bed Heat Transfer, Academic Press, London, 1975.




SME5610 FINITE ELEMENT METHODS IN THERMAL L T P Credits Total.Marks

ENGINEERING 4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES • To understand the basic concepts of FEM and to perform heat and thermal stress analysis for various modes of

heat transfers.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION 12 Hrs. Importance of stress analysis, heat transfer and fluid flow, conservation laws for mass, momentum and energy;

Fourier equation, N-S equations; energy principles in stress analysis; Basic equations in elasticity; Boundary conditions. Some Basic Discrete Systems: Discrete systems as basis for FEM analysis; Examples of discrete systems in stress analysis, heat transfer and fluid flow.

UNIT 2` FINITE ELEMENTS 12 Hrs. 1-D Finite Elements: Introduction; Elements and shape functions - one dimensional linear element (bar element),

one dimensional quadratic element. 2-D Finite Elements: two dimensional linear triangular elements, Local and Global coordinate systems, quadratic triangular elements, two dimensional quadrilateral elements, isoparametric elements, three dimensional elements, beam, plate and shell elements, composite materials. Formulation: Introduction; Variational approach; methods of weighted residuals for heat transfer problems, principle of virtual work for stress analysis problems; mixed formulation; penalty formulation for fluid flow problems. Primitive variables formulation for flow problems. UNIT 3 HEAT CONDUCTION PROBLEMS 12 Hrs.

FEM analysis of steady state heat conduction in one dimension using linear and quadratic elements; steady state heat conduction in two dimensions using triangular and rectangular elements; three dimensions problems, Axisymmetric problems. Transient and Phase change problems: Transient heat conduction in one and multi dimensional problems; time stepping scheme using finite difference and finite element methods; phase change problems - solidification and melting; Inverse heat conduction problems. UNIT 4 STRESS ANALYSIS PROBLEMS 12 Hrs.

Introduction; stress analysis in one, two (plane stress and plane strain) and three dimensions; Axi-symmetric problems; beam and plate bending problems; thermal stress development; shrinkage stress development; prediction of distortions in manufactured products; Introduction to simple dynamic problems. UNIT 5 CONVECTIVE HEAT TRANSFER PROBLEMS 12 Hrs.

Introduction; Galerkin method of Steady, convection-diffusion problems; upwind finite element in one dimension - Petro-Galerkin formulation, artificial diffusion; upwind method extended to multi-dimension; transient convection – diffusion problems - FEM solutions, extension to multi dimensions; primitive variables approach (u, v, w, p, t formulation); characteristic - based split scheme (CBS); artificial compressibility scheme; calculation of Nusselt number, drag and stream function; mesh convergence; Introduction to convection in Porous media; Laminar and turbulent flows.

Max. 60 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Lewis, R.W. Nithiarasu, P. and Seetharamu, K. N. Fundamentals of the finite element method for heat and fluid flow ,

John Wileyand Sons, 2004. 2. Lewis, R.W. Morgan, K, Thomas. H.R, Seetharamu, K.N. The finite element method in heat transfer analysis, John Wiley

and Sons,1996. 3. Reddy, J.N. and Gartling D.K.,The finite element method in heat transfer and fluid dynamics, CRC publications, 2000. 4. Zienkiewicz, O.C. and Taylor, R.L. The finite element method volume 3: fluid dynamics, John Wiley & Sons, 2001. 5. Tirupathi R. Chandrupatla, Ashok D. Belegundu,Introduction to Finite Elements in Engineering, Prentice-Hall Ltd., 2002. 6. Bavikatti, S.S. Finite Element Analysis, New Age International, 2005.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 6 Questions of 5 Marks each uniformly distributed among all units – No Choice 30 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 14 Marks. 70 Mark

SME5611 THERMAL AND NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS L T P Credits Total.Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To study various power plants

To study the various accessories involved in power plants

To Study measurement instrumentations


Sources of energy, Type of Power plants. Direct energy conversion system, Energy sources in India, Recent developments in power generation, Combustion of coal, Volumetric analysis, Gravimetric analysis. Fuel gas analysis.

Steam power plant: Introduction. General layout of steam power plant, Modern coal. Fired Steam, Steam power plant. Power plant cycle, Fuel Handling, Combustion equipment, Ash handling, Dust collectors.

Steam Generators: Types, Accessories. Feed water heaters, Performance of boiling, Water treatment, Cooling towers. Steam turbines. Compounding of turbines, Steam condensers, Jet and surface cond ensers.

UNIT 2 GAS TURBINE POWER PLANT 12 Hrs. Cogeneration. Combined cycle power plant, Analysis, Waste heat recovery, IGCC power plant, Fluidized bed, Combustion, Advantages, and Disadvantages.

UNIT 3 NUCLEAR POWER PLANT 12 Hrs.

Nuclear physics, Nuclear Reactor, Classification, Types of reactors, Site selection. Method of enriching uranium. Application of nuclear power plant. Nuclear Power Plant Safety: Bi -Product of nuclear power generation, Economics of nuclear power plant, Nuclear power plant in India, Future of nuclear power.

UNIT 4 ECONOMICS OF POWER GENERATION 12 Hrs.

Factors affecting the economics, Loading factors, Utilization factor, Performance and operating characteristics of power plant, Point economic load sharing, Depreciation. Energy rate, C riteria for optimum loading. Specific - Economic energy problem.

UNIT 5 POWER PLANT INSTRUMENTATIONS 12 Hrs. Classification, Pressure measuring instrument, Temperature measurement and Flow Measurement, Analysis of combustion gases, Pollution types, Methods of control.

Max. 60 Hours


1. James H. Rust, Nuclear Power Plant Engineering, Haralson Publishing Company,1979

2. Mohamed Mohamed El-Wakil, Powr Plant Technology,Tata McGraw Hill, 2010

3. Amano, R.S Sunden, B. Thermal Engineering in Power Systems, WIT Press, 2008

4. Sharma, P.C.Power Plant Engineering, Kotearia Publications.

5. Rajput, R.K. Power Plant Engineering, Lakshmi Publications,2013




SME5612 DESIGN OF MATERIAL HANDLING EQUIPMENT L T P Credits Total.Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

Assimilation of basic concepts to impart use, application and design of different material handling techniques,

equipments and machines used in common use and in industrial sectors

Exposure to practical aspects

UNIT 1 ELEMENTS OF MATERIAL HANDLING SYSTEM 12 Hrs.

Types, selection and applications. Importance, Terminology, Objectives and benefits of better Material Handling;

Principles and features of Material Handling System; Interrelationships between material handling and plant layout,

physical facilities and other organizational functions; Classification of Material Handling Equipments. Factors affecting

for selection; Material Handling Equation; Choices of Material Handling Equipment; General analysis Procedures; Basic

Analytical techniques; The unit load concept; Selection of suitable types of systems for applications ; Activity cost data

and economic analysis for design of components of Material Handling Systems; functions and parameters affecting

service; packing and storage of materials.

UNIT 2 DESIGN OF HOISTS 12 Hrs.

Design of hoisting elements: Welded and roller chains - Hemp and wire ropes - Design of ropes, pulleys, pulley

systems, sprockets and drums, Load handling attachments. Design of forged hooks and eye hooks – crane grabs -

lifting magnets - Grabbing attachments - Design of arresting gear -Brakes: shoe, band and cone types.

UNIT 3 DRIVES OF HOISTING GEAR 12 Hrs.

Hand and power drives - Traveling gear - Rail traveling mechanism - cantilever and monorail cranes - slewing, jib

and luffing gear - cogwheel drive - selecting the motor ratings.

UNIT 4 CON VEYORS 12 Hrs.

Types - description - design and applications of Belt conveyors, apron conveyors and escalators Pneumatic

conveyors, Screw conveyors and vibratory conveyors.

UNIT 5 ELEVATORS 12 Hrs.

Bucket elevators: design - loading and bucket arrangements - Cage elevators - shaft way, guides, counter weights,

hoisting machine, safety devices - Design of fork lift trucks.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Rudenko, N., Materials handling equipment, ELnvee Publishers, 1970.

2. Spivakovsy, A.O. and Dyachkov, V.K., Conveying Machines, Volumes I and II, MIR Publishers, 1985.

3. Alexandrov, M., Materials Handling Equipments, MIR Publishers, 1981.

4. Boltzharol, A., Materials Handling Handbook, The Ronald Press Company, 1958.

5. P.S.G. Tech., “Design Data Book”, Kalaikathir Achchagam, Coimbatore, 2003.

6. Lingaiah. K. and Narayana Iyengar, “Machine Design Data Hand Book”, Vol. 1 & 2, Suma Publishers, Bangalore,

1983.





SME5613 DESIGN OF HYDRAULIC AND PNEUMATIC SYSTEMS L T P Credits Total Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

• To impart students on the science, use and application of hydraulics and pneumatics as fluid power in Industry. Also to impart knowledge on the methodology of basic and advanced design of pneumatics and hydraulics systems.

UNIT 1 OIL HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS AND HYDRAULIC ACTUATORS 12 Hrs. Hydraulic Power Generators — Selection and specification of pumps, pump characteristics. Linear and Rotary Actuators — selection, specification and characteristics.

UNIT 2 CONTROL ANDR EGULATION ELEMENTS 12 Hrs. Pressure - direction and flow control valves - relief valves, non-return and safety valves - actuation systems.

UNIT 3 HYDRAULIC CIRCUITS 12 Hrs.

Reciprocation, quick return, sequencing, synchronizing circuits - accumulator circuits - industrial circuits - press circuits - hydraulic milling machine - grinding, planning, copying, - forklift, earth mover circuits- design and selection of components - safety and emergency mandrels.

UNIT 4 PNEUMATIC SYSTEMS AND CIRCUITS 12 Hrs.

Pneumatic fundamentals - control elements, position and pressure sensing - logic circuits - switching circuits - fringe conditions modules and these integration - sequential circuits - cascade methods - mapping methods - step counter method - compound circuit design - combination circuit design.

UNIT 5 INSTALLATION, MAINTENANCE AND SPECIAL CIRCUITS 12 Hrs. Pneumatic equipments- selection of components - design calculations — application -fault finding - hydro pneumatic circuits - use of microprocessors for sequencing - PLC, Low cost automation - Robotic circuits.

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Antony Espossito, “Fluid Power with Applications”, Prentice Hall, 1980.

2. Dudleyt, A. Pease and John J. Pippenger, “Basic fluid power”, Prentice Hall, 1987.

3. Andrew Parr, “Hydraulic and Pneumatics” (HB), Jaico Publishing House, 1999.

4. Bolton. W., “Pneumatic and Hydraulic Systems”, Butterworth —Heinemann, 1997.

5. Shanmuga Sundaram, K. “Hydraulic and Pneumatic Controls: Understanding made Easy” S.Chand & Co Book publishers, New Delhi, 2006 (Reprint 2009)




SME5614 FRACTURE MECHANICS L T P Credits Total Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES


under static load conditions.


under fatigue load condition.

UNIT 1 ELEMENTS OF SOLID MECHANICS 12 Hrs.

The geometry of stress and strain, elastic deformation, plastic and elasto-plastic deformation - limit analysis – Airy’s

function – field equation for stress intensity factor.

UNIT 2 STATIONARY CRACK UNDER STATIC LOADING 12 Hrs.

Two dimensional elastic fields – Analytical solutions yielding near a crack front – Irwin’s -approximation - plastic zone

size – Dugdaale model – determination of J integral and its relation to crack opening displacement.

UNIT 3 ENERGY BALANCE AND CRACK GROWTH 12 Hrs.

Griffith analysis – stable and unstable crack growth –Dynamic energy balance – crack arrest mechanism KIC test

methods - R curves - determination of collapse load.

UNIT 4 FATIGUE CRACK GROWTH CURVE 12 Hrs.

Empirical relation describing crack growth law – life calculations for a given load amplitude – effects of changing

the load spectrum -- rain flow method– external factors affecting the KIC - values.- leak before break analysis.

UNIT 5 APPLICATIONS OF FRACTURE MECHANICS 12 Hrs.

Crack Initiation under large scale yielding – thickness as a design parameter – mixed mode fractures – crack instability

in thermal and residual stress fields - numerical methods

Max. 60 Hours


1. David Broek, ”Elementary Engineering Fracture Mechanics “, Fifthoff and Noerdhoff International Publisher, 1978.

2. Kare Hellan, “Introduction of Fracture Mechanics”, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1985.

3. Preshant Kumar, “Elements of Fracture Mechanics”, Wheeler Publishing, 1999.

4. John M.Barson and Stanely T.Rolfe Fatigue and fracture control in structures Prentice hall Inc. Englewood cliffs. 1977

5. Tribikram Kundu, “Fundamentals of Fracture Mechanics”, Ane Books Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi/ CRC Press, 1st Indian Reprint,

2012





SME5615 TRIBOLOGY IN DESIGN L T P Credits Total Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To impart knowledge in the friction , wear and lubrication aspects of machine components

To understand the material properties which influence the tribological characteristics of surfaces.

To understand the analytical behavior of different types bearings and design of bearings based on analytical

/theoretical approach

UNIT 1 SURFACE INTERACTION AND FRICTION 12 Hrs.

Topography of Surfaces – Surface features-Properties and measurement – Surface interaction – Adhesive Theory of Sliding Friction –Rolling Friction-Friction properties of metallic and non-metallic materials – friction in extreme conditions –Thermal considerations in sliding

contact

UNIT 2 WEAR AND SURFACE TREATMENT 12 Hrs.

Types of wear – Mechanism of various types of wear – Laws of wear –Theoretical wear models-Wear of Metals and Non metals – Surface treatments – Surface modifications – surface coatings methods- Surface Topography measurements –Laser methods –instrumentation -

International standards in friction and wear measurements

UNIT 3 LUBRICANTS AND LUBRICATION REGIMES 12 Hrs.

Lubricants and their physical properties- Viscosity and other properties of oils – Additives-and selection of Lubricants- Lubricants standards ISO,SAE,AGMA, BIS standards – Lubrication R eg i m es –Solid Lubrication-Dry and marginally lubricated contacts- Boundary

Lubrication- Hydrodynamic lubrication – Elasto and plasto hydrodynamic - Magneto hydrodynamic lubrication – Hydro static lubrication – Gas

lubrication.

UNIT 4 THEORY OF HYDRODYNAMIC AND HYDROSTATIC LUBRICATION 12 Hrs.

Reynolds Equation,-Assumptions and limitations-One and two dimensional Reynolds Equation-Reynolds and Sommerfeld boundary

conditions- Pressure wave, flow, load capacity and friction calculations in Hydrodynamic bearings-Long and short bearingsPad bearings and

Journal bearings-Squeeze film effects-Thermal considerationsHydrostatic lubrication of Pad bearing- Pressure , flow , load and friction calculationsStiffness considerations- Various types of flow restrictors in hydrostatic bearings

UNIT 5 HIGH PRESSURE CONTACTS AND ELASTO HYDRODYNAMIC LUBRICATION 12 Hrs.

Rolling contacts of Elastic solids- contact stresses – Hertzian stress equation- Spherical and cylindrical contacts-Contact Fatigue life- Oil

film effects- Elasto Hydrodynamic lubrication Theory-Soft and hard EHL-Reynolds equation for elasto hydrodynamic lubrication- - Film shape within and outside contact zones-Film thickness and friction calculation- Rolling bearings- Stresses and deflections-Traction drives

Max. 60 Hours


1. Rabinowicz.E, “Friction and Wear of materials”, John Willey & Sons, UK, 1995

2. Cameron, A. “Basic Lubrication Theory”, Ellis Herward Ltd., UK, 1981

3. Halling, J. (Editor) – “Principles of Tribology “, Macmillian – 1984.

4. Williams J.A. “Engineering Tribology”, Oxford Univ. Press, 1994.

5. Basu, S.K. Sengupta S.N.& Ahuja, B.B. ”Fundamentals of Tribology”, Prentice –Hall of India Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 2005

6. Stachowiak G.W. & Batchelor, A.W . Engineering Tribology, Butterworth-Heinemann, UK, 2005






SME5616 PHYSICS OF MATERIALS L T P Credits Total.Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

• To understand the fundamental principles of quantum mechanics, energy diagrams and properties.

UNIT 1 12 Hrs.

Quantum mechanics ; Applications to materials and engineering, Band structures and cohesive energy, thermal

behavior, electrical conduction, semiconductors, amorphous semiconductors, magnetic behavior of materials, liquid

crystals. Quantum Theory, Schrödinger Equation, One-Dimensional Time-Independent Potentials, Three-Dimensional

Time-Independent Potentials, Hydrogen Atom and Periodic Table, Bonding, Quantum Statistical Mechanics, Free Electron

Theory of Metals, Beyond the Free Electron Theory of Metals, Band Theory of Solids.

UNIT 2 12 Hrs.

Energy band diagrams, nature of chemical bonds and their relation to crystal structure of semiconductors -

elemental and compound semiconductors. Band gap, Fermi level carrier mobility and scattering; temperature dependent

conductivity - intrinsic and extrinsic (doped) semiconductors; preparation and doping techniques of elemental and

compound semiconductors and their characterization; narrow and wide band gap semiconductors; Hall Effect,

thermo-electric, magnetic and optical properties; different types of semiconductors and their application in commercial

devices: Ge, Si, GaAs, InP, PbS, HgxCd1-xTe.

UNIT 3 12 Hrs.

Physical properties of materials Conductivity : specific heat, Heat capacity, Mechanical properties, yield strength,

tensile strength, ductility, fatique, creep, fracture, Optical, Magnetic, Electronic, Semiconducting, Superconducting,

Thermal, Electro-optic, Thermo-optic, Superionic, insulator properties of materials.

UNIT 4 12 Hrs.

Physical properties of nanomaterials, particle size, particle shape, melting point, surface tension, wettability,

specific surface area and pore size, Reason for change in optical properties, electrical properties, and mechanical

properties.

UNIT 5 12 Hrs.

Principles: Models and phenomena underlying semiconductor processing, topics to be covered include defects,

diffusion, ion implantation, epitaxy, thermal oxidation, plasma processing, thin films, semi conductor devices,

very-large-scale integration (VLSI) processes and nanoelectronic devices.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Pillai, Solid State Physics, Narosa Publication, India (2007)

2. Gersten, J.I. and Smith, F.W. The Physics and Chemistry of Materials, Wiley & Sons (2001).

3. Wahab, M.A. Solid State Physics: Structure and Properties of Materials. Narosa Book Distributors Pvt.Ltd., 2009.

4. Gupta, S.L. and Kumar V.. Solid State Physics. K.Nath & Co.,1995.

5. Ali Omar. M. Elementary Solid State Physics. Pearson Education, 2002.

6. Rogalski M.S. and Palmer. S.B. Solid State Physics. Gordon Breach Science Publishers, 2000.

7. Ashcroft N.W. and Mermin. N.D. Solid State Physics, Cengage Learning, 2003.

8. Dekker. A.J Solid State Physics. Macmillan, 2000.

9. Navrotsky, Physics and Chemistry of Earth Materials, 6th Edition, (1995) Cambridge Series.

10. Nanomaterials Synthesis, properties and applications”, Editor:- A.S Edelstein, IOP Publishing, UK (1996).

11. “Hand book of Nanostructured Materials and Technology”, Vol.1-5, Editor:- Hari Singh Nalwa; Academic Press, USA (2000).






SME5617 PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS L T P Credits Total.Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

• To understand the mechanical, electrical, optical and thermal properties

UNIT 1 12 Hrs.

Mechanical Properties : Factors affecting mechanical properties, mechanical tests, tensile, hardness, impact, creep

and fatigue, Plastic deformation by slip, shear strength, work hardening and recovery, fracture, Griffith 's theory, slip and

twinning, creep resistant materials, diffusion – Fick’s law.

UNIT 2 12 Hrs.

Dielectric Properties : Dielectric constant and polarizability, different kinds of polarization, Internal electric field in

a dielectric, Clausius, Mossatti equation, dielectric in a ac field, dielectric loss, ferroelectric, types and models of fer ro

electric transition, electrets and their applications, piezoelectric and pyroelectric materials.

UNIT 3 12 Hrs.

Magnetic Properties : Classification dia, para, ferro, antiferro and ferrimagnetism, Langevin and Weiss theories,

exchange interaction, magnetic aniostrophy, magnetic domains, molecular theory, hysterisis, hard and soft magnetic

materials, ferrite structure and uses, magnetic bubbles, magnetoresistance, GMR materials, dilute magnetic

semiconductor (DMS) materials.

UNIT 4 12 Hrs.

Optical Properties : Optical absorption in insulators, semiconductors and metals, band to band absorption,

luminescence, photoconductivity. Injection luminescence and LEDs, LED materials, superluminescent LED materials,

liquid crystals, properties and structure, liquid crystal displays, comparison between LED and LC displays.

UNIT 5 12 Hrs.

Thermal properties : Electron transport, electrical conductivity, specific heat, heat capacity, diffusion and laws of

diffusion, Concept of solid state ionics, Importance of super-ionic materials and structures, Classification of Superionic

solids, Experimental probes pertaining to solid state ionics, Theoretical models of fast ion transport, Applications of fast

ionic solids, Hydrogen storage materials, Nano –ionic materials.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Raghavan, V. Materials Science and Engineering: A first Course. PHI Learning,2009.

2. Kasap. S.O. Principles of Electronic Materials and Devices. Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2007.

3. Suryanarayana, C. and A.Inoue. Bulk Metallic Glasses, CRC Press, 2011.

4. Otsuka K.and Wayman, C.M. Shape Memory Materials, Cambridge University Press, 1998.






SME5618 CORROSION SCIENCE L T P Credits Total.Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

• To understand the basic corrosion mechanism and preventive techniques

UNIT 1 12 Hrs.

Basics of Corrosion : Different forms of Corrosion, electrochemical corrosion, thermodynamic principles of electrochemical reactions,

Electromotive Force Series, Pourbaix Diagrams, Evans Diagrams, Mixed Potential Theory, Passivity.

UNIT 2 10 Hrs.

Electrochemical methods to Measure Corrosion : DC Polarization, AC Impedance, Environmentally Induced Cracking, Corrosion Fatigue,

Hydrogen Induced Cracking, Application of Fracture mechanics.

UNIT 3 14 Hrs.

Atmospheric Corrosion : Oxidation in Gaseous Environments, Ellingham Diagrams, Role of Protective Scale, Scale growth kinetics and

mechanisms, Wagner~s parabolic scale growth process, other types of kinetic laws and mechanisms, morphological aspects in the growth of thick

scales, corrosion product evaporation, analyses of kinetic data, alloy oxidation, kinetics, mechanisms, morphology; binary and ternary alloys in

single oxidant and in mixed environments, internal oxidation examples, hot corrosion of metals and alloysmechanisms and examples. Molten Salt Corrosion, Environmental degradation of ceramics, Degradation of Polymeric Materials, Microbial corrosion, Corrosion of Bio-Implants,

Corrosion Prevention methods.

UNIT 4 12 Hrs.

Coating applications : Abrasive, erosive and sliding wear, The interaction between wear and corrosion, Coating systems for corrosion and

wear protection, new coating concepts including multi-layer structures, functionally gradient materials, intermetallic barrier coatings and thermal

barrier coatings for corrosion prevention.

UNIT 5 12 Hrs.

Environmental effects from chemical processes : industry infrastructure and transportation industry Atmospheric Corrosion, Corrosion in

Automobiles, Corrosion in Soils, Corrosion of Steel in Concrete, Corrosion in Water, Microbiologically Induced Corrosion, Corrosion in the Body, Corrosion in the Petroleum Industry, Corrosion in the Aircraft Industry, Corrosion in the Microelectronics.

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1 Jones, D. A. Principles and Prevention of Corrosion, Macmillan Publ. Co. (1996).

2 Scully, C. The Fundamental of Corrosion, 2nd ed., Pergamon Press: E. E.Stansbury and R. A. Buchanan,

3. Fundamentals of Electrochemical Corrosion, ASM International (2000)

4. Fontana, M.G. Corrosion Engineering, 3rd. Ed., McGraw Hill. (1986)

5. West, J. M. Electrodeposition and Corrosion Control, J. Wiley W. Revie (ed.): Corrosion Handbook,

6. Electrochemical Society Series, John Wiley and Sons (2000).

7. Revie, W. (ed.): Corrosion Handbook, Electrochemical Society Series, John Wiley and Sons, 2000: Metals Handbook, Vol. 13: Corrosion,

ASM International

8. Jones, D.A.. Principles and Prevention of Corrosion. Macmillan Publishing Co., 1995.

9. Bockris, J.O.M. Conway, B.E. Yeager, E. and White. Electrochemical Materials Science in Comprehensive

10. Treatise of Electrochemistry, Volume 4. Plenum press, 2001.

11. Fontanna, M.G. and Greene, N.D.. Corrosion Engineering, McGraw-Hill publishing, 1978.

12. Hutchings. I.M. Tribology: Friction and Wear of Engineering Materials. CRC press, Boca Raton, 1992.

13. Sprowds. D.O. Corrosion Testing and Evaluation. Corrosion Metals Hand book, Vol. 13, 1986.





SME5619 ADVANCED METALLIC MATERIALS AND L T P Credits Total.Marks

PROCESSES 4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

• To understand the fundamental of metallic materials and processes

UNIT 1 12 Hrs. Advanced Al Alloys : High temperature and high strength Al alloys such as Al -Fe-V-Si, nanocrystalline Al alloys, etc., Ti based Alloys, Advances in Ti based Alloys.

UNIT 2 12 Hrs.

Superalloys and intermetallics : Ni base and Co base superalloys, Shape Memory Alloys, physical metallurgy, properties, etc. Advanced Composites, nanocomposites, etc., Aluminides, Silicides, borides, Nitrides and Carbides. Synthesis, Structure and Properties.

UNIT 3 12 Hrs. Amorphous Materials ; Metallic glasses, Glass forming ability, Thermodynamics and kinetics of glass formation, Bulk Metallic Glasses, Properties, Quasicrystalline Materials, Structure, Synthesis, Properties;

UNIT 4 12 Hrs.

Fundamental analysis of Manufacturing processes, casting, casting processes, forging, methods of forging, extrusion, rolling, spinning, turning, and shaping, milling, grinding. Production of powders, powder mixing, compacting, types of presses, sintering, soaking, finishing process, limitations and advantages of powder metallurgy and applications.

UNIT 5 12 Hrs.

Advanced Processes : Rapid solidification processing, Laser surface Modification, plasma processing of materials, plasma nitriding, carburizing, Mechanical Alloying, Rapid prototyping, Self propagating High temperature synthesis, inert gas condensation etc.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Muralidhara, M.K.. Materials Science and Processes. Dhanpat Rai Publishing Co., New Delhi, 1998.

2. Gupta. R.B. Materials Science and Processes. Satya Prakashan, New Delhi, 1995

3. Steen William, M.. Laser Material Processing. Springer, 2008

4. Rhodes, W.T. Callen W.R. and D.C.O “Shea. An Introduction to Lasers and their Applications”. Addison Wesley Professional, 1977.

5. Raghavan, V. Materials Science and Engineering: A first Course. PHI Learning,2009.

6. Kasap, S.O. Principles of Electronic Materials and Devices. Tata McGraw-Hill,New Delhi, 2007.

7. Suryanarayana, C. and Inoue, A. Bulk Metallic Glasses, CRC Press, 2011.

8. Otsuka, K. and Wayman,C.M.. Shape Memory Materials, Cambridge University Press, 1





SME5620 MATERIALS FOR ENERGY L T P Credits Total.Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

• To understand the basics of fuel cells, materials and nuclear materials

UNIT 1 14 Hrs. Approach to the challenge of energy-efficient technology : concept of materials energy content (production,

processing, use and recycling, introduction to conventional and renewable forms of energy, solar cells, nuclear materials, hard materials for oil/gas recovery, composites for wind energy, thermoelectrics. Energy transformation (e.g., fuel cells, light emitting diodes, engines and turbines) and energy storage (e.g., hydrogen storage, phase change materials). Finally, materials enabling energy-efficient transportation and housing will be discussed.

UNIT 2 12 Hrs. Solar Photo Voltaic (PV) cells : Single and multi-crystalline silicon solar cells, amorphous silicon, thin film; Cd-Te,

CIGS, CZTS, nano, micro, poly-Si. Transparent conducting coating, Multi-junction, solar PV concentrator, flexible solar cells, Emerging PV; dye sensitized, other organic, and quantum dot cells. Nano-engineered materials.

UNIT 3 12 Hrs. Materials for Concentrated Solar Power (CSP): Reflector materials, glass, metal, polymer and film, Receiver and

collectors; absorptive coating and anti-reflective coating. Materials and shapes for thermal storage, Lithium ion Batteries.

UNIT 4 10 Hrs. Fuel cells ; materials and construction; PEM Fuel Cell (FC), AFC, PAFC, MCFC, SOFC. Catalysts for electro catalysis, fuel reformer and water splitting.

UNIT 5 12 Hrs. Nuclear Materials; Types of fission-distribution of fission products, fissile and fertile materials, neutron emission in

fission, spontaneous fission, Bohr, Wheeler theory, chain reaction, four factor formula, criticality condition, materials for fuels, moderator, coolants, and shielding.

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1 Vielstich, W., et al. (eds.) (2009). Handbook of fuel cells: advances in electrocatalysis, materials, diagnostics and durability.

vol. Hoboken: Wiley, 2009 2. Francis de Winter, Solar Collectors, Energy Storage, and Materials (Solar Heat Technologies), MIT Press, USA (1991)

3. David S. Ginley, David Cahen, Fundamentals of Materials for Energy and Environmental Sustainability, Cambridge 4. University Press (2011) 5. Materials, Electronics, and Renewable Energy Part III Physics, Small lecture theatre, Cavendish Laboratory lecturers: 6. David MacKay and Neil Greenham

7. Fuel Cell Handbook, 8. Introduction to Fuel Cell Technology 9. Evans, Atomic Physics, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1986. 10. Glasstone, S. Principles of Nuclear Reactor Engineering. Van Nostrand Co, Inc., New York, 1985.

11. Roy, R.R. and Nigam, B.P.. Nuclear Physics. Wiley Easter, New Delhi, 1985. 12. Tayal, D.S. Nuclear Physics. Himalaya Publishers, Bombay, 1998



SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF MECHANICAL

SME5621 CHEMICAL SYNTHESIS OF MATERIALS L T P Credits Total.Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE • To understand the fundamental synthesis processes of materials and applications

UNIT 1 14 Hrs. Nanomaterials : Defining nanodimensional materials, Size effects in Nanomaterials, Application and technology

development, Supramolecular machines, Fundamentals of energy transfer and photon motion manipulation, Solar energy harvesting, Fundamentals of electron motion manipulation, Electron pumping and molecular wires, General methods available for the synthesis of nanomaterials, Manipulation o Nanopartices, Nanofabrication, Methods, Bottom up methods, Photolithography, Scanning probe methods, Soft lithography, Biosynthesis, Recombinant DNA, Solid phase synthesis of peptides and nucleic acids, vapor phase synthesis (electronic materials) Gas phase reactions , Chemical vapor deposition, Molecular beam epitaxy

UNIT 2 12 Hrs. Fundamentals of molecular : self-assembly, Self-assembling monolayers, The nanoscale and colloidal systems,

Supramolecular self-assembly, Gels, 3D self-assembly, Fundamentals of Surface and interfacial chemistry, Surface tension and Wettability, Insoluble monolayers, Surface Chemistry and monolayers, Electrostatic interactions in self assembling systems, Self-Assemble of amphiphiles, Monolayers, Micelles and microemulsions, the Structure and properties of Micelles

UNIT 3 12 Hrs. Gelation, Classes of gels: physical gels, chemical gels, Theory of Gelation. Hydrogels: Types of hydrogels,

Application of hydrogels, Formation of hydrogels, Processing of hydrogels, Types of colloids and their formation, Forces between colloidal particles. Assembly and phase behavior, Charges and stabilization, Kinetics, Defects in assembly, Approaches to control long range order. Characterization. Applications of colloids, especially in photonics and optoelectronics.

UNIT 4 12 Hrs.

Polymers : polymerization: Polycondensations, Addition chain growth, Copolymerization . Living polymerizations, Hyperbranching The interaction of polymers with surfaces, Polyelectrolyte multilayer assemblies, The application of electrostatic self-assembly to construct multilayers, Fabrication methods including self assembly.

UNIT 5 10 Hrs. Functionalization and applications of Nanomaterials : Chemical functionalization, Recent advances in

Thiol-Au and Silane Chemistry, Layer-by-Layer synthesis of multilayer assemblies Applications, Quantum dots, nanocores and applications, Detailed description of the fabrication of functinalised Gold Nanocores and their application in cancer therapy.

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Vielstich, W., et al. (eds.) (2009). Handbook of fuel cells: advances in electrocatalysis, materials, diagnostics and

durability, vol. Hoboken: Wiley, 2009 2. Francis de Winter, Solar Collectors, Energy Storage, and Materials (Solar Heat Technologies), MIT Press, USA (1991) 3. David S. Ginley, David Cahen, Fundamentals of Materials for Energy and Environmental Sustainability, Cambridge

University Press (2011) 4. Materials, Electronics, and Renewable Energy Part III Physics, Small lecture theatre, Cavendish Laboratory lecturers:

David MacKay and Neil Greenham



SME5622 MECHANICAL AND HIGH TEMPERATURE L T P Credits Total.Marks

BEHAVIOUR OF MATERIALS 4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

• To understand the factors involving in high temperature materials and their behaviour.

UNIT 1 12 Hrs.

Factors influencing functional life of components at elevated temperatures, definition of creep curve, various stages of creep, metallurgical factors influencing various stages , effect of stress, temperature and strain rate, Design of transient creep, time hardening, strain hardening, expressions for rupture life for creep.

UNIT 2 12 Hrs.

Ductile and brittle materials, Monkman - Grant relationship, Various types of fracture, bri ttle to ductile from low temperature to high temperature, cleavage, ductile fracture due to microvoid coalescence - diffusion controlled void growth, fracture maps for different alloys and oxides.

UNIT 3 12 Hrs. Strengthening mechanisms, solid solution, strengthening, precipitation hardening by gamma prime, grain boundary strengthening, TCP phase - embrittlement, solidification of single crystals.

UNIT 4 12 Hrs.

Fatigue: Stress cycles, S-N curves, Effect of mean stress, Factors affecting Fatigue, Structural changes accompanying fatigue, Cumulative damage, HCF / LCF, thermomechanical fatigue, application of fracture mechanics to fatigue crack propagation, fatigue testing machines- Pari~s Equation, Residual life prediction under Fatigue.

UNIT 5 12 Hrs.

Oxidation, Pilling-Bedworth ratio, kinetic laws of oxidation - defect structure and control of oxidation by alloy additions - sulphation, hot gas corrosion deposit, modified hot gas corrosion, effect of alloying elements on hot corrosion, Iron base, nickel base and cobalt base superalloys, composition control.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Courtney T.H, “Mechanical Behaviour of Materials”, McGraw Hill, 1990

2. Raj R, “Flow and Fracture at Elevated Temperatures”, American Society for Metals, 1985

3. Hertzberg R. W, „Deformation and Fracture Mechanics of Engineering Materials~, 4th

4. Edition, John Wiley, 1996.

5. Dieter, G. E., “Mechanical Metallurgy”, McGraw-Hill Co., SI Edition, 1995.

6. Davis, H. E., Troxell G. E. and Hauck, G. E. W., “The Testing of Engineering Materials”, McGraw-Hill, 1982.

7. Wulff, “The Structure and Properties of Materials, Vol. III - Mechanical Behaviour of Materials”, John Wiley andSons, New York, USA, 1983.

8. Honeycombe R. W. K., “Plastic Deformation of Materials”, Edward Arnold Publishers, 1984.

9. Suryanarayana, A. V. K., “Testing of Metallic Materials”, Prentice Hall India, New Delhi, 1979.

10. Prashant Kumar, “Elements of Fracture Mechanics”, McGraw-Hilll, 2009.





SME5623 TECHNOLOGY OF SEMICONDUCTORS L T P Credits Total.Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

• To understand the fundamentals of semiconductors technology and devices

UNIT 1 12 Hrs. Introduction, metals, insulators and semiconductors - crystal structure and bonding, concepts of electron energy

bands and electrical conductivity; classification of semiconductors, narrow and wide band-gap semiconductors, quantum well lasers, current transport and electronic properties of interfaces-effect of alloying,

UNIT 2 14 Hrs. Unipolar devices: Metal-Semiconductor contacts - Energy - Band Relation - Schottky Effect – Characterization of

Barrier Height - Device Structure - Ohmic Contact - JFET and MESFET - basic device characteristic - general characteristic – Microwave performance - related field-effect devices - MIS diode - Si-SiO2 MOS diode - Charge-Coupled Device - MOSFET - basic device characteristic – Non-uniform doping and buried-channel devices - short-channel effect - MOSFET Structures - Nonvolatile memory devices. Bipolar transistor – Static characteristics - microwave transistor - power transistor - switching transistor - related device structures - Thyristors - basic characteristics - Schottky diode - Three terminal thyristor - related power thyristor - Unijunction transistor and trigger thyristor - Field-controlled thyristor.

UNIT 3 10 Hrs. Fundamental principles (nucleation and growth, diffusion and mass transport) and techniques of processing

semiconductor devices and heterostructures - nucleation and growth of thin films, modern epitaxial methods, structure of interfaces, types of defects, thin film deposition methods, ion implantation, rapid thermal processing, fundamentals of microfabrication, etc.

UNIT 4 12 Hrs. Deposition, Epitaxy and Chemical Vapour Deposition. Thermodynamics and other theoretical aspects, Metal

Organic Vapour Phase Epitaxy – Principles and process design. Metal organic source molecules, Kinetics Liquid Phase Epitaxy, Chloride Based Epitaxy, Selective Area Growth, Heteroepitaxy Molecular Beam Epitaxy, In situ characterization of epitaxial films. Defects in epitaxial films, Heteroepitaxy, Epitaxy and applications of nanostructures, Epitaxy and applications of GaN, AlGaN etc.strained-layer super lattices, misfit dislocations and critical thickness concepts,

UNIT 5 12 Hrs. Photonic Devices : Light Emitting diodes, LED for fiber optics, LED performance, reliability, Semiconductor Laser,

Lasers for optical communication system, future trends in Fiber optic communications, Photodetectors, Photoconductor, Photodiode, Avalanche Photodiode, Phototransistor, Solar cells, sensors and MEMs, Thin film solar cells, solid state sensors, optical Sensors, optoelectronic components, dilute magnetic semiconductors and spintronics.

Max. 60 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Sze, S.M. Physics of Semiconductor devices (2nd edition). Wiley Eastern Ltd., New Delhi,1 981. 2. Keller, S.P.. Handbook on Semiconductors, Vol. 1-4. T.S.Moss, Ed., North-Holland, Amsterdam, 1980. 3. Wolfe,C.M. Holonyak, J.R.N. and Stillman, G.E.. Physical Properties of Semiconductors. Prentice Hall International

Inc.,London, 1989. 4. Butcher, P.N. March, N.H. and Tosi, M.P.. Crystalline Semiconducting materials and devices. Plenum Press New York

and London, 1986. 5. Fraser, D.A. The Physics of Semiconductor devices. Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1986. 6. Schroder, D. K.. Semiconductor Material and Device Characterization. John Wiley & Sons Inc., New York,1990. 7. Pulfrey D. L. and Garry Tarr N.. Introduction to Microelectronic Devices. Prentice-Hall international editions, New Delhi,1 989. 8. Gise P. & Blanchard, R. Modern Semiconductor Fabrication Technology. Prentice-Hall, New Jersey, 1986.




SME5624 CERAMICS SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY 4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

• To understand the fundamentals of ceramics and various properties

UNIT 1 12 Hrs.

Review of bonding types in ceramics – calculation of percentage ionic character. Types of ceramcis, Ceramic crystal structures: Sodium

chloride, cesium chloride, alumina, spinel and lf uorite structures - examples. Co-ordination number and ionic radius ratio - Pauling~s Rules. Simple problems involving Packing Fraction, critical radius ratio and density. Ceramic Materials : Definition, classification, Defects: point, surfaces, interfaces and non-equilibrium structure short-range and long-range order, imperfections,

polymorphism. Ceramic Binary and ternary systems, ceramic microstructures. Crystallization of glass and glass-ceramics. Thermal,

electrical, magnetic and optical properties of ceramics and application. Classification of ceramic materials conventional and advanced, areas of applications.

UNIT 2 12 Hrs.

Sintering and microstructure of ceramics Thermodynamics and kinetics : experimental aspects of sintering, Interface effects, Matter

transport, Ceramic Forming Processes Solid phase sintering, Sintering with liquid phase: vitrification, Sintering additives, Pressure sintering and hot isostatic pressing, Ceramic powders: different route for synthesis, Ceramic particle suspensions, Casting, Pressing, Extrusion-injection molding,

Extraction of organic shaping additives, Deposition techniques.

UNIT 3 12 Hrs.

Important ceramics : Alumina, Mullite and Spinel, Zirconia, Non-oxide Ceramics, Mechanical Properties of Ceramics, Materials for Cutting, Drilling and Tribology, Ceramics for Electronics: Conductors and insulators, Dielectrics, Magnetic materials, Electronic properties of

surfaces and interfaces in semi-conductor ceramic materials, Influence of microstructure on electrical properties, Ceramic components in

electronics.

UNIT 4 12 Hrs.

Bioceramics : Biomedical ceramics and their field of use, Biological properties, Processing of bioceramics, Nuclear Ceramics: Fuels,

Absorbers and Inert Matrices, Fuel element, Absorptive ceramics, Inert matrix ceramics, Sol-gel Methods and Optical Properties.

UNIT 5 12 Hrs.

Property evaluation, Rupture strength, fracture Toughness, Elastic Constants, Hardness, Creep, Thermal Property-Coefficient of thermal expansion, Electronic Property, Measurement of electro-optic properties- Weibull Statistics of Strength Data for Fine Ceramics.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Norton, F.H Elements of Ceramics, Addison-Wesley Press (1974)

2. Barsoum, M.W. Fundamentals of Ceramics, McGraw-Hill (2003)

3. Kingery, W.D Introduction to Ceramics, Wiley & Sons (1976).

4. Lawrence H. Van Vlack, Physical Ceramics for Engineers, Addison-Wesley Publishing (1964).

5. Singer, F. and Singer, S.J. Industrial Ceramics, Chapman & Hall, UK (1963)

6. Michael Barsoum, “Fundamentals of Ceramics”, Mc Graw Hill Publishing Co., INC, 1997.

7. William F.Smith, “Foundations of Materials Science and Engineering”, Second Edition, McGraw - Hill Inc, New York, 1993.

8. VanVlack K H, “Physical Ceramics for Engineers”, Addison Wesley, 1964.





SME5625 NANOSCALE FABRICATION AND L T P Credits Total.Marks

MEASUREMENT TECHNIQUES 4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

• To understand the fundamental principles of nanoscale fabrication techniques and measurements

UNIT 1 12 Hrs. Miniaturization Quantum phenomena in nano-systems : photonic band gap structure, quantum states in nanosized

structures, quantum transport. Spintronics: Injection, spin relaxation and spin dephasing, Spintronic devices and applications, spin filters, spin diodes, spin transistors.

UNIT 2 12 Hrs.

Preparation techniques Basic micro- and nano-fabrication techniques : thin film deposition, sputtering, Chemical vapour deposition and its variants, ion implantation, diffusion, oxidation, surface micromachining, LIGA process, Packaging, die preparation, surface bonding, wire bonding, sealing, assembly Measurement techniques, Thickness measurements, scanning tunneling microscope, atomic force microscope, focused ion beam technique, nanoindentation, nanotribometer, scratch indentation.

UNIT 3 12 Hrs. Nano-fabrication : Need for a clean room, Types of clean rooms, maintenance of different types of clean rooms,

oxidization and metallization, masking and patterning, Etching technologies, wet and dry etching, photolithography, Drawbacks of optical lithography for nanofabrication, electron beam lithography, ion beam lithography, strain-induced self-assembly for Nanofabrication of quantum dots and moleculararchitectures, Polymer processing for biomedical applications.

UNIT 4 12 Hrs. Applications and devices Mechanics for micro- and nano-systems : bending of membrane and cantilever,

resonance vibration, fracture, stress, nano Tribology, Fluid dynamics for micro and nano- systems surface tension, viscosity, continuity equation laminar fluid flow, fluid flow in submicron and nanoscale, Surface acoustic wave (SAW) devices, microwave MEMS, field emission display devices, nanodiodes, nanoswitches, molecular switches, nano-logic elements, Super hard nanocomposite coatings and applications in tooling, Biochemistry and medical applications: lab-on-a-chip systems.

UNIT 5 12 Hrs. Surface characterization techniques; UV and X-ray photoelectron spectroscopy (UPS, XPS); Auger electron

pectroscopy (AES); low energy electron diffraction and reflection high energy electron diffraction (LEED, RHEED) secondary ion mass spectrometry (SIMS); Rutherford backscattering (RBS); Medium energy ion scattering (MEIS); Electron energy loss spectroscopy (EELS) and highresolution EELS (HREELS)

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Hsu, T.R.. MEMS & Microsystems Design and Manufacture.McGraw Hill, 2002.

2. Sadamichi Maekawa, "Concepts in Spintronics", Oxford University Press, 2006. 3. Lyshevski, S.E.. Nano- and microelectromechanical systems. Boca Raton, CRC Press, 2001. 4. Waser, R. (ed.). Nanoelectronics and Information Technology. Aachen, Wiley-VCH, 2003.

5. B.Bhushan. Springer Handbook of Nanotechnology. Springer-Verlag, 2004. 6. Pelesko, J.A. and Bernstein, D.H.. Modeling MEMS and NEMS. Boca Raton, Chapman &Hall/CRC, 2003. 7. Woodruff D.P. and Delchar T.A., "Modern techniques of surface science", Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, 1994.

8. Mark J Jackson, Micro and Nanomanufacturing , Springer; First Edition, (2006) ISBN-10:038725744 9. Dieter K, Schroder, Semiconductor Material and Device Characterization, Wiley-IEEE Press, 3rd Edition, (2006)

ISBN-10:0471739065

10. Zheng Cui, Micro-nanofabrication: Technologies and Applications, Springer First Edition (2006), ISBN-10:3540289224


Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 6 Questions of 5 Marks each uniformly distributed among all units – No Choice 30 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 14 Marks. 70 Marks



SME5626 NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING 4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

• To understand the fundamental principles of NDT and their detection techniques

UNIT 1 12 Hrs.

Introduction and Surface NDT Methods : Definition of terms, discontinuities and defects/flaws, fracture mechanics concept of design and the role of NDT, life extension and life prediction, penetrant testing and magnetic particle testing, basic principle of penetrant testing, limitations and advantages, basic principle involved in magnetic particle testing, development and detection of large flux, longitudinal and circular magnetization, demagnetization.

UNIT 2 12 Hrs. Radiographic Testing : Electromagnetic spectrum, X-ray and gamma ray sources, X-ray generation, The spectrum

of X-rays, Equipment controls, gamma ray sources, properties of X-rays and gamma rays, attenuation and differential attenuation, interaction of radiation with matter, Principle of radiographic testing and recording medium, films and fluorescent screens, nonimaging detectors, film radiography, calculation of exposure for X-ray and gamma rays, quality factors, Image quality indications and their use in radiography.

UNIT 3 12 Hrs.

Ultrasonic Testing : Ultrasonic waves, velocity, period, frequency and wavelength, reflection and transmission, near and far field effects and attenuation, generation, piezoelectric and magnetostriction methods, normal and angle probes, methods of Ultrasonic testing, Principle of pulse echo method, Equipment, examples, rail road inspection, wall thickness measurement, range and choice of frequency.

UNIT 4 12 Hrs. Eddy Current Testing : Introduction, Principles of eddy current inspection, conductivity of a material, magnetic

properties, coil impedance, lift off factor and edge effects, skin effect, inspection frequency, coil arrangements, inspection probes, types of circuit, Reference pieces, phase analysis, display methods, typical applications of eddy current techniques.

UNIT 5 12 Hrs. Other Methods : Imaging, principle and applications, testing of composites, acoustic emission testing, application of

AET, on-line monitoring or continuous surveillance and applications in materials science, Optical methods of NDT, photo elasticity, evaluation procedure, Holographic NDT procedure, speckle phenomenon, speckle interferometry, speckle shear interferometry, Fourier optics, Fourier filtering techniques for non-destructive testing.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Hull, B. and John, V. Nondestructive Testing. Mc Millan Education Ltd., London, 1988. 2. Metals Hand Book, Vol.2, 8th Edition, ASTM, Metals Park, Ohio.

3. Dainty, Laser Speckle & Related Phenomena, Springer-Verlag, New York, 1984. 4. Mc Gonnagle, W.J. Non-destructive testing methods, Mc Graw Hill Co., NY, 1961.

5. Sze, S.M.. Physics of Semiconductor devices (2nd edition). Wiley Eastern Ltd., New Delhi,1981. 6. S.P.Keller. Handbook on Semiconductors, Vol. 1-4. T.S. Moss, Ed., North-Holland, Amsterdam, 1980.

7. Wolfe, C.M. Holonyak,J.R.N. and Stillman, G.E.. Physical Properties of Semiconductors. Prentice Hall International Inc.,London, 1989.

8. Butcher, P.N. March, N.H. and Tosi, M.P.. Crystalline Semiconducting materials and devices. Plenum Press New York andLondon, 1986.

9. Fraser, D.A.. The Physics of Semiconductor devices. Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1986.

10. Schroder, D. K.. Semiconductor Material and Device Characterization. John 11. Wiley & Sons Inc., New York, 1990. 11. Gise, P. & Blanchard, R. Modern Semiconductor Fabrication Technology. Prentice-Hall, New Jersey, 1986






SME5627 BIOMATERIALS 4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE • To understand the various materials related to biological, dental and other applications

UNIT 1 12 Hrs. Biological Performance of Materials : Biocompatibility, inflammatory process, coagulation and hemolysis, approaches to thrombo, resistant materials development.

UNIT 2 12 Hrs. Orthopaedic Materials : Bone composition and properties, temporary fixation devices, joint replacement,

biomaterials used in bone and joint replacement: metals and alloys, stainless steel, cobalt based alloys, titanium based materials, ceramics, carbon, alumina, zirconia, bioactive calcium phosphates, bioglass and glass ceramics, polymers: PMMA, UHMWPE/HDPE, PTFE, bone cement, composites.

UNIT 3 12 Hrs. Cardiovascular Materials : Blood clotting, blood rheology, blood vessels, the heart, aorta and valves, geometry of

blood circulation, the lungs, vascular implants, vascular graft, cardiac valve prostheses, cardiac pacemakers, blood substitutes, extracorporeal blood circulation devices

UNIT 4 12 Hrs.

Dental Materials : Teeth composition and mechanical properties, impression materials, bases, liners and varnishes for cavities, fillings and restoration materials, materials for oral and maxillofacial surgery, dental cements and dental amalgams, dental adhesives.

UNIT 5 12 Hrs.

Other Materials : Biomaterials in ophthalmology, viscoelastic solutions, contact lenses, intraocular lens materials, tissue grafts, skin grafts, connective tissue grafts, suture materials, tissue adhesives, drug delivery, methods and materials, selection, performance and adhesion of polymeric encapsulants for implantable sensors

Max. 60 Hours


1. Bhat, S. V.. Biomaterials, Narosa Publication House, New Delhi, 2010. 2. Park, J. & Lakes, R.S.. Biomaterials: An Introduction. Springer, 2007.

3. Black, J.. Biological Performance of Materials: Fundamentals of Biocompatibility, Marcel Dekker Inc, New York, 1992.

4. Williams, D.F. (editor). Materials Science and Technology: A Comprehensive treatment, Volume 14. Medical and ental Materials, VCH Publishers Inc, New York, 1992.

5. Hench, L.L. and Ethridge, E.C.. Biomaterials: An Interfacial Approach, Academic Press, 1982.






SME5628 SMART MATERIALS 4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

• To understand the fundamental principles of smart materials involving sensors, piezoelectric and technological

materials

UNIT 1 12 Hrs.

Smart Materials and Structural Systems : Classes of materials and their usage, Intelligent /Smart materials,

Evaluation of materials Science, Structural material, Functional materials, Polyfunctional materials, Generation of smart

materials, Diverse areas of intelligent materials, Primitive functions of intelligent materials, Examples of intelligent

materials, structural materials, Electrical materials, Intelligent biological materials, Biomimetics, Wolff~s law,

Technological applications of Intelligent materials.

UNIT 2 12 Hrs.

Sensors : Sensing technologies, Micro sensors, Intelligent systems, Hybrid smart materials, An algorithm for

synthesizing a smart material, Passive sensory smart structures, Reactive actuator based smart structures, Active

sensing and reactive smart structures, Smart skins, Aero elastic tailoring of airfoils, Synthesis of future smart systems.

UNIT 3 12 Hrs.

Piezoelectric Smart Materials Background: Electrostriction, Pyroelectricity, Piezoelectricity, Industrial

piezoelectric materials, PZT, PVDF, PVDF film, Properties of commercial piezoelectric materials, Properties of

piezoelectric film (explanation), Smart materials featuring piezoelectric elements, smart composite laminate with

embedded piezoelectric actuators, SAW filters.

UNIT 4 12 Hrs.

Shape, Memory Alloys : Background on shape, memory alloys (SMA) Nickel, Titanium alloy (Nitinol), Materials

characteristics of Nitinol, Martensitic transformations, Austenitic transformations, Thermoelastic martensitic

transformations, Cu based SMA, chiral materials, Applications of SMA, Continuum applications of SMA fasteners, SMA

fibers, reaction vessels, nuclear reactors, chemical plants, etc. Micro robot actuated by SMA, SMA memorization

process, SMA blood clot filter, Impediments to applications of SMA, SMA plastics, primary molding, secondary molding,

Potential applications of SMA plastics.

UNIT 5 12 Hrs.

Technological Materials : Metallic glasses, preparation, properties and applications, rheological fluids, CCD

device materials and applications, surface acoustic wave and sonar transducer materials and applications, nanophase

materials and their properties.

Max. 60 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Gandhi, M.V. and Thompson, B.S. Smart Materials and Structures. Chapman and Hall, London, First Edition, 1992

2. Deurig, T.W. Melton, K.N. Stockel, D. and Wayman, C.M. Engineering aspects of Shape Memory alloys, Butterworth –

Heinemann, 1990

3. Rogers, C.A. Smart Materials, Structures and Mathematical issues, Technomic Publising Co., USA, 1989.






SME5629 SUPERCONDUCTING MATERIALS AND L T P Credits Total.Marks

APPLICATIONS 4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

• To understand the principles of superconducting materials including high temperature superconductors and applications

UNIT 1 12 Hrs.

Basic Experimental Aspects : Zero electrical resistance, Meissner effect, a.c. diamagnetic susceptibility, heat capacity, optical absorption by superconductor, entropy change, thermal conductivity, destruction of superconductivity by external magnetic fields, type I and type II materials, superconducting behaviour under high pressures, flux quantization, normal and Josephson tunneling.

UNIT 2 10 Hrs. Superconducting Materials ; Elemental superconductors, superconducting compounds and its alloys, A-I5 compounds, chevral phase compounds.

UNIT 3 12 Hrs. High Temperature Superconductors : La-Ba-Cu-O, Y-Ba-cu-O, Bi-Sr-Ca-Cu-O and new systems and their crystal structures, Experimental studies on the new materials, organic superconductors, fullerenes.

UNIT 4 14 Hrs.

Theoretical Aspects : Isotope effect, BCS theory, Role of electrons and phonons, applications of electron band structure results to calculate electron-phonon coupling constant McMillan~s formula, GLAG theory, recent theories on high Tc materials, Coherence length, expression for critical temperature Tc, critical field Hc, critical current Jc, heavy fermion superconductivity.

UNIT 5 12 Hrs.

Applications ; Superconducting magnets, power generators, motors, transformers, power storage, power transmission, Josephson junction devices, IR sensors, SQUIDS, SLUGS, magnetically levited trains, computer storage elements.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Narlikar, A.V. and Ekbote. Introduction to Superconductivity. South Asia publishers, 1983.

2. Tilley, D.R. and Tilley. Superfluidity and Superconductivity. Adam Hilger, 1986.

3. Kowk, H.S. and Shaw, D.T. (Eds.). Superconductivity and its Applications. Elsevier Science Publishing,1988.

4. Narlikar, A.V.. Studies on High temperature superconductors- Advances in research and applications. Nova Scientific, New Delhi, 1990.





SME5630 INDUSTRIAL TRIBOLOGY L T P Credits Total.Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To understand the basics of friction, wear and lubrication including nano-tribology

UNIT 1 12 Hrs.

Friction and Wear: Laws of friction, types, friction coefficient, wear, types, control of wear.Lubrication: Mechanism, boundary, Hydrodynamic & Hydrostatic lubrication, Reynolds equation in 2D and 3D flow, solid, liquid and gas lubricants, types and application.

UNIT 2 14 Hrs. Tests and Instrumentation in Tribology: Sliding friction and wear abrasion test, solid particle and erosion test, scratch indentation test, calowear, Pin-on disc-tribometer.

UNIT 3 14 Hrs.

Micro/Nano-tribology and applications – Tribology for MEMS, wear resistant coatings - New industrial applications of tribology – Nano scale wear, Micro scale scratching and Micro scale wear - Wear mapping and Nano lubrication and specialized materials selection for Nano Tribology, Nanoindentaion measurements.

UNIT 4 10 Hrs. Case studies in automotive, chemical industry, marine, microelectronics, Basics test (mechanisms, modeling) - Lab and industrial - Prevention, monitoring and environmental effects

UNIT 5 10 Hrs. Characterizing techniques, optical microscopy, scanning electron microscopy/EDX, atomic force microscopy, roughness measurements, X-ray diffraction, Raman spectroscopy.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Gwidon W Stachowiak, Andrew W. Batchelor, Engineering Tribology , Elsevier, 3rd Edition, 2005

2. Bharat Bhushan, Principles and Applications of Tribology, John Wiley & Sons Inc., 1999.

3. Summers Denis J., and Smith., An Introductory guide to Industrial Tribology, Mechanical Engineering Publications Limited,

London, 1994.






SAE5601 MISSILE AERODYNAMICS 4 0 0 4

100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To gain knowledge on how missiles are classified and to know about its characteristics. To develop a thorough understanding of the stability of missiles and flow around its surfaces.


Different Types of Missiles and their Characteristics; Different Types of Controls and their Merits / Demerits; Overall Aerodynamics Forces and Moments; Major Components of Missiles and their Contributions; Effect of Aspect Ratio, and Shapes; Preliminary Estimates of Forces on Missiles.

UNIT 2 LONGITUDINAL AND LATERAL AND DIRECTIONAL STABILITY 12 Hrs. Six Degree of Freedom; Forces and Moments for Two Degree of Freedom; Derivation of Forces, Moments and

Static Margin; Load Factors for Complete Missile, Canard, Wing and Tail Controls; Interference Factors; Methods to Alter the Stability of Missile. Assumptions; Relation between Angles in Pitch and Yaw Plane with Total Angle of Attack; Methods to Estimate the Stability of Missile in Yaw Plane; Effect of Different Control Surfaces; Induced Rolling; Roll Damping.

UNIT 3 DYNAMIC STABILITY 12 Hrs.. Introduction; Equation of Motion for Six Degrees of Freedom, Oscillating and Non Oscillating Motion; Short and

Long Period; Phugoid Motion; Longitudinal Dynamic Stability with Two and Three Degree of Freedom; Time-to- Half and Time- to- Double; Effect due to Angular Velocity; Lateral Dynamic Stability; Response Characteristics of Missile.

UNIT 4 COMPRESSIBLE FLOW 12 Hrs.. Flow Through Passage of Varying Area; Nozzle with Different Back Pressures; Improper Expansion of Nozzles;

Diffuser; Wind Tunnels; Different Types of Wind Tunnels; Major Components of Wind Tunnels; Measurement Technique for Various Aerodynamic Parameters; Simulation Parameters.

UNIT 5 APPROXIMATE METHODS AND SIMILARLY RULES 12 Hrs.. Derivation of Small Perturbation Equation; Assumptions for Linearised Perturbation Equation at Subsonic,

Supersonic and Transonic Speed; Hodograph Method. Prandtl- Glauert and Goethert Similarly Rules, Karman Similarity and Transonic Speed; Hypersonic Similarity Rule; Area Rule; Drag Divergence; Critical Mach Number; Flow Past Wedge and Cone at Subsonic and Supersonic Speed.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Chin, S. S., “Missile Aerodynamics”, McGraw Hill publishers,1961

2. Liepmann, H. & Roshko, A., “Gas Dynamics”, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2002 3. Anderson, John D., “Fundamentals of Aerodynamics”, fifth edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishers, 2010






SAE5602 COMPUTATIONAL AERODYNAMICS 4 0 0 4

100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To gain knowledge on computational fluid dynamics and various applications associated with it.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION 12 Hrs. Computational Fluid Dynamics; Classification of Partial Differential Equations; Linear and Non- linear Partial Differential

Equations – Model Equation, Elliptic Equation, Parabolic Equation and Hyperbolic Equation; System of 1st order Partial Diffe rential Equations; System of 2nd order Partial Difference Equations; Initial Conditions; Boundary Conditions.

UNIT 2 FINITE DIFFERENCE FORMULATIONS 12 Hrs. Introduction; Taylor Series Expansion; Finite Difference by Polynomial; Finite Difference Equations; Higher Order

Derivatives; Multidimensional Finite Difference Formulas; Applications; Finite Difference Approximation of Mixed Partial Derivatives; Stability Analysis; Discrete Perturbation Stability Analysis; Von Neumann Stability Analysis; Multidimension al Problem; Error Analysis; Artificial Viscosity.

UNIT 3 SOLUTION METHODS OF FINITE DIFFERENCE EQUATIONS 12 Hrs.. Elliptic Equations – Finite Difference Formulations, Jacobi Iteration Method, Point Gauss Seidel Iteration Method, Line

Gauss Seidel Iteration Method, Point Successive Over Relaxation Method, Line Successive Over Relaxation Method, Alternating Direction Implicit Method, Applications; Parabolic Equations – Finite Difference Formulations, Explicit Schemes, Implicit Schemes, Alternating Direction Implicit Schemes, Parabolic Equations in Two-space Dimensions, Approximate Factorization, Fractional Step Methods; Hyperbolic Equations – Explicit and Implicit Schemes, Splitting Methods, Multistep Methods, Application to Linear and Non-linear Problems, Flux Corrected Transport, Classification of Numerical Scheme, TVD Formulations; Application – Heat conduction, Couette Flow and Wave Motion.

UNIT 4 INCOMPRESSIBLE NAVIER- STOKES EQUATIONS 12 Hrs..

Introduction; Primitive Variable and Vorticity Stream Function Formulations; Poisson Equations for Pressure (Primitive Variable and Vorticity Stream Function Formulation); Numerical Algorithm (Primitive Variable); Artificial Compressibility; Solution on a Regular Grid; Crank Nicolson Implicit Method; Boundary Conditions (Body Surface, Far Field, Symmetry, Inflow, Outflow); Staggered Grid; Marker and Cell Method; Implementation of Boundary Conditions; DuFort Frankel Scheme; Use of the Poisson Equation for Pressure; Unsteady Incompressible Navier- Stokes Equation.

UNIT 5 EULER EQUATIONS AND FINITE VOLUME METHOD 12 Hrs..

Explicit Formulations – Steger and Warming Flux Vector Splitting, Van Leer Flux Vector Splitting, Runge Kutta Formulation, TVD Formulation; Implicit Formulations – Steger and Warming Flux Vector Splitting; Boundary Conditions; Global Time Step and Local Time Step; Application – Diverging Nozzle Configuration, Shock Tube or Reimann Problem, Supersonic Channel Flow. Approximation of Surface Integrals; Cell centered and Nodal Point Scheme; Interpolation and Differentiation Practices; Implementation of Boundary Conditions.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Chung T.J., Computational Fluid Dynamics, Cambridge University Press, 2002

2. Chow C.Y, “Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics”, John Wiley, 1979. 3. Hirsch A.A. , ‘Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics”, McGraw-Hill, 1989.

4. Bose T.K., “Computation Fluid Dynamics” Wiley Eastern Ltd., 1988.

5. Wirz H.J. and Smeldern.J.J. “Numerical Methods in Fluid Dynamics”, McGraw-Hill & Co., 1978.

6. John D. Anderson, JR” Computational Fluid Dynamics”, McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc., New York, 1995.







SAE5603 THEORY OF TURBULENCE

4 0 0 4

100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To understand the basic concepts associated with turbulent flow and its characteristics.

To study about the turbulence modelling, boundary layer and anemometers.


Laminar and Turbulent Flows; Origin of Turbulence; Characteristics of Turbulent Flow; Mean and Turbulent

Quantities; Averaging Rules; Derivation of Continuity and Momentum Equations for Turbulent Flow; Compressibility

and Incompressibility Effect; Reynolds Averaged Navier- Stokes Equation for Turbulent Flow; Reynolds Stress;

Closure Problem.

UNIT 2 TURBULENCE MODELING AND BOUNDARY LAYER 12 Hrs.

Derivation of Energy Equation for Mean and Turbulent Quantities; Importance of Different Terms and Physical

Significance; Boussinesq and Prandtl- Karman Hypothesis for Turbulence Modeling; Prandtl Mixing Length Theory;

Introduction to Different Turbulence Modeling; Log Law; Law of Friction; Velocity Defect Law; Universal Velocity

Profile for Ducts and Pipes; Friction Factors for Turbulent Flow. Momentum Integral Equation for Laminar Flow;

Turbulent Boundary Layer on Flat Plate; Skin Friction; Boundary Layer on Rough Surface; Admissible and Critical

Roughness; Boundary Layer with Pressure Gradient; Analogy with Laminar Boundary Layer; Momentum- Energy

Integral Equation; Method of Truckenbort and Advantages.

UNIT 3 HOT WIRE ANEMOMETER 12 Hrs..

Measurement of Turbulent Quantities; Basic Principle of Hot Wire Anemometer; Kings Law; Constant

Temperature and Constant Current Anemometer; Measurement of Mean and Turbulent Quantities; Major Components

of Hot Wire Anemometer; Measurement of Reynolds Stress; Different Types of Hot Wire Probes and Applications.

UNIT 4 LASER DOPPLER ANEMOMETER 12 Hrs..

Basic Principle of LDA; Different Types of LDA and Application; Reference Beam, Dual Beam and Dual

Scattering LDA; Forward and Backward Scattering; Major Components of Two- Component LDA; Merits and Demerits

in Comparison to Hot Wire Anemometer.

UNIT 5 ISOTROPIC AND NON ISOTROPIC TURBULENCE 12 Hrs..

Introduction to Isotropic and Non Isotropic Turbulence; Double Velocity Correlation, Triple Correlation,

Different Types of Correlation Coefficients; Microscale and Integral Scale; Energy Spectrum; Dynamic Equation of

Energy Spectrum; Grid Turbulence; Decay of Isotropic Turbulence; Free and Wall Turbulence; Behaviour of Turbulent

Flow behind Cylinder and Jet Flow.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Hinze, H., “Theory of Turbulence”, 2nd ed. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1975.

2. Schlichting, H., “Boundary Layer Theory”, mcgraw-hill 1979.

3. Tennekes and H. Lumley, “A First Course in Turbulence”, The MIT Press, Massachusetts, 1987.

4. Biswas. G and V. Eswaran, “Turbulent Flows: Fundamentals, Experiments and Modeling”, Narosa Publishing

House, New Delhi, India, 2002.

5. Mathieu, J. and Scott, J. An Introduction to Turbulent Flow. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press,

2000.







SAE5604 ELEMENTS OF HYPERSONIC FLIGHT

4 0 0 4

100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

• To develop a thorough understanding of hypersonic flight with inviscid flow fields and viscous flow.


Hypersonic Flow; Shock Layer; Entropy Layer; Viscous Interaction; High Temperature Flows; Low Density Flows;

Velocity Altitude Map.

UNIT 2 HYPERSONIC SHOCK- EXPANSION THEORY 12 Hrs.

Shock Relation ; Hypersonic Shock Relations in Terms of the Hypersonic Similarity Parameter; Expansion

Relation; Newtonian Flow; Modified Newtonian Law; Centrifugal Force Corrections to Newtonian Theory; Tangent -

Wedge/ Tangent- Cone Methods; Shock- Expansion Method.

UNIT 3 HYPERSONIC INVISCID FLOWFIELDS (APPROXIMATE METHODS) 12 Hrs.

Introduction; The Governing Equations; Mach Number Independence; The Hypersonic Small - Disturbance

Equations; Hypersonic Similarity; Hypersonic Small- Disturbance Theory; The Hypersonic Equivalence Principle and

Blast Wave Theory; Thin Shock- Layer Theory.

UNIT 4 HYPERSONIC INVISCID FLOWFIELDS (EXACT METHODS) 12 Hrs.

General Thoughts; Method of Characteristics; The Hypersonic Blunt- Body Problem; Correlations for Hypersonic

Shock- Wave Shapes; Modern Computational Hypersonics.

UNIT 5 VISCOUS HYPERSONIC FLOW 12 Hrs.

Governing Equations for Viscous Flow; The Navier- Stokes Equations; Similarity Parameters and Boundary

Conditions; The Boundary Layer Equations for Hypersonic Flow; Hypersonic Boundary Layer Theory; Self - Similar

Solutions, Flat Plate Case, Stagnation Point Case; Hypersonic Transition; Hypersonic Turbulent Boundary Layer;

Hypersonic Aerodynamic Heating; Entropy Layer Effects on Aerodynamic Heating. CFD Solutions of Hypersonic

Viscous Flows: Introduction; Viscous Shock- Layer Technique; Parabolized Navier- Stokes Solutions; Full

Navier-Stokes Solutions.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Anderson, John D., “Hypersonic and High Temperature Gas Dynamics”, McGraw -Hill, 2001

2 . John.D.Anderson, Jr., Modern Compressible Flow with Historical perspective Hypersonic Series. M c G r a w -H i l l

Bo o k C o , 2 0 0 0 .

3. William H. Heiser and David T. Pratt, Hypersonic Air Breathing propulsion, AIAA Education Series., Washington,

DC, 1988

4. John T. Bertin, Hypersonic Aerothermodynamics, AIAA Inc., Washington D.C, 1994.





SME5605 BOUNDARY LAYER THEORY L T P Credits Total Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To understand the importance of boundary layer in Aerodynamics To understand various types of boundary layers and their applications

UNIT 1 VISCOUS FLOW EQUATIONS Navier-Stokes Equations, Creeping motion, Couette flow, Poiseuille flow through ducts, Ekman drift.

12 Hrs.

UNIT 2 LAMINAR BOUNDARY LAYER 12 Hrs. Development of boundary layer – Estimation of boundary layer thickness, Displacement thickness -

Momentum and energy thicknesses for two dimensional flow – Two dimensional boundary layer equations – Similarity solutions - Blasius solution.

UNIT 3 TURBULENT BOUNDARY LAYER 12 Hrs. Physical and mathematical description of turbulence, two-dimensional turbulent boundary layer equations,

Velocity profiles – Inner, outer and overlap layers, Transition from laminar to turbulent boundary layers, turbulent boundary layer on a flat plate, mixing length hypothesis.

UNIT 4 APPROXIMATE SOLUTION TO BOUNDARY LAYER EQUATIONS 12 Hrs. Approximate integral methods, digital computer solutions – Von Karman – Polhausen method.

UNIT 5 THERMAL BOUNDARY LAYER 12 Hrs. Introduction to thermal boundary layer – Heat transfer in boundary layer - Convective heat transfer, importance of non dimensional numbers – Prandtl number, Nusselt number, Lewis number etc.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Schlichting H, “Boundary Layer Theory”, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1979.

2. Frank White – Viscous Fluid flow – McGraw Hill, 1998

3. Reynolds A. J., “Turbulent flows in Engineering”, John Wiley & Sons, 1980.

4. Ronald L., Panton, “Incompressible fluid flow”, John Wiley & Sons, 1984.


PART A : 6 Questions of 5 Marks each uniformly distributed among all units – No Choice PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 14 Marks.

Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. 30 Marks 70 Marks



SAE5606 TURBO MACHINERY AERODYNAMICS L T P Credits Total.Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To understand about various types of turbines, compressors and their working principles and applications

UNIT 1 SINGLE-STAGE AXIAL FLOW COMPRESSORS 12 Hrs. Introduction to Turbo machineries, a simple two dimensional analytical model,2-D Losses in axial flow

compressor stage, Profile Loss and Blade performance estimation 3-D flows in Blade passages, Secondary flows, Tip leakage flow, Scrubbing, Simple three dimensional flow analysis, Full Radial Equilibrium Equation, Free-vortex and other 3-D flow theories, Axial compressor characteristics, Single stage characteristics.

UNIT 2 MULTI-STAGES AXIAL FLOW COMPRESSORS AND FANS 12 Hrs. Multi-staging of compressor characteristics, Multi-spool axial compressor characteristics, LPC, HPC, Instability

in Axial Compressors, Loss of Pressure Rise and efficiency, Loss of Stability Margin, Rotating Stall and Surge, Modal and spike disturbance, Inlet Distortion and Rotating Stall, Vibrations and Fatigue, Design of compressor blades,2 -D blade section design : Airfoil Design – subsonic, transonic and supersonic profiles, Axial Flow Track Design and Inter-spool duct flow, Transonic Compressors and Shock Structure models in Transonic Blades, Transonic Compressor Characteristics,3-D Blade shapes of Rotors and Stators in modern compressors, Compressor Instability and control, Noise problem in Axial Compressors and Fans

UNIT 3 AXIAL FLOW TURBINES 12 Hrs. Introduction, Turbine stage, Turbine Blade 2-D (cascade) analysis, Work Done, Degree of Reaction, Losses and

Efficiency, Flow Passage, Exit flow conditions, Multi-staging and Multi-spooling of Turbine, 3-D flows in Blade passages, Secondary flows, Tip leakage flow & Inter-spool ducts, Free-vortex and other 3-D flow theories, Turbine Blade Cooling, Turbine Blade design –Turbine Profiles : Airfoil Data and Profile construction, 3-D blade shapes

UNIT 4 CENTRIFUGAL COMPRESSORS AND RADIAL FLOW TURBINES 12 Hrs. Centrifugal Compressors-Introduction, Elements of centrifugal compressor/ fan, Inlet Duct and guide vane,

Impeller , Diffuser vanes and vane less diffusers, Slip factor, Concept of Rothalpy, Modified work done, Inlet Incidence and Exit lag angles: Impeller and static vanes, Centrifugal Compressor Characteristics, Surging, Chocking, Rotating stall, Sources of Centrifugal Compressor Losses, Design of Centrifugal Compressors, Design of impellers, Design of subsonic and supersonic vane diffusers, vane less volutes, Radial Turbine, Introduction, Thermodynamics and Aerodynamics of radial turbines, Radial Turbine ,Characteristics, Losses and efficiency, Design of Radial Turbines

UNIT 5 USE OF CFD FOR TURBOMACHINERY ANALYSIS AND DESIGN 12 Hrs. Computer aided blade profile generation, Cascade Analysis ; Periodicity and boundary conditions, 3-D blade generation and 3-D flow analysis, Flow track and inter-spool duct analysis and design

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Nicholas Cumpsty, Compressor Aerodynamics, Kreiger Publications, USA, 2004.

2. Johnson I.A., Bullock R.O. NASA-SP-36, Axial Flow Compressors, (re-release), NTIS, 2002.

3. El-Wakil, M M; Powerplant Technology, McGraw-Hill Pub, 1984

4. NASA-SP-290, Axial Flow turbines, NTIS, USA, 2002.

5. Horlock J H, Axial flow compressors, Butterworths, UK 1958.

6. Lakshminarayana B; Fluid Mechanics and Heat Transfer in turbomachineries,Â , USA, 1995.





L T P Credits

Total.Marks

SAE5607 AEROSPACE MATERIALS 4 0 0 4

100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To know about various types of metals and composite materials used in aerospace applications and their mechanical characterisations.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION 12 Hrs. Aerospace Materials, design requirements for aerospace structural materials, general perspectives of advanced aerospace materials with regard to fuselage, propulsion and space vehicle applications.

UNIT 2 METALLIC MATERIALS 12 Hrs.

Aluminium alloys-Physical metallurgy and mechanical properties with emphasis on aeronautical requirement, temper designations, processing and properties, alloy specifications of aerospace grade Al-alloys; magnesium alloys used for aerospace applications; structural steels-various grades of steels used for landing gear, transmission systems and fatigue critical applications; Titanium alloys-Physical metallurgy, mechanical properties, processing and applications of aerospace grade alloys; Evolution of materials for aero-engine applications, recent developments for aero-gas turbine, advanced thermal barrier coatings on super alloys used for gas turbine.

UNIT 3 NI-BASE SUPERALLOYS 12 Hrs. Evolution of materials for aero-engine applications, recent developments for aero-gas turbine, advanced thermal barrier coatings on super alloys used for gas turbine.

UNIT 4 POLYMERIC BASED COMPOSITE (PMC) MATERIALS 12 Hrs.

Introduction, quasi-static strength of PMCs, reinforcements and matrices in PMCs, interfaces, processing and properties of composites, advantages of composites; carbon fibres, Carbon fibre-reinforced plastics (CFRP) and glass fibre reinforced plastics (GFRP), joining and repair of composites, Introduction to Damage tolerant composites, Destructive and Non-destructive testing, fracture and toughness of composites, fatigue strength of PMCs. Metal -based composite materials-Introduction, metal- ceramic composites, laminates, and applications of MMCs.

UNIT 5 SMART MATERIALS 12 Hrs.

Recent advances in smart materials’ applications in aerospace, super plastic forming and diffusion bonding processing of aerospace alloys. Life prediction of materials and structures in aerospace-fatigue and fracture of metallic materials, random load fatigue and life prediction, physical reason for the existence of effective ţK (ţKeff), crack growth and life prediction, special testing techniques- SCC, fracture toughness, micro structural degradation, stress rupture etc.

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Brian Cantor, H.Assender Aerospace Materials, P.Grant, , CRC Press,2001

2. Ronald J. Ferrara and Stephen L. Gossett ,Aerospace Materials, , Kendall Hunt Pub Co; Spi edition, 1994.

3. Sam Zhang, Dongliang Zhao ,Aerospace Materials Handbook, , CRC Press, 2012.






SAE5608 HELICOPTER AERODYNAMICS AND DYNAMICS 4 0 0 4

100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To gain knowledge on how helicopter is working with basic principles.. To develop a thorough understanding of vertical flight and horizontal flight and also the stability of helicopter.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION 12 Hrs. Historical Development of Helicopters; Helicopter Configuration; Control Requirements; Types of Rotor Systems; Basic Power Requirements.

UNIT 2 INTRODUCTION TO HOVERING THEORY 12 Hrs. Momentum Theory. Blade Element Theory. Combined Blade Element and Momentum theories for non uniform inflow calculation. Ideal Rotor Vs Optimum Rotor.

UNIT 3 VERTICAL FLIGHT Various flow states of Rotor. Autorotation in Vertical Descent. Ground Flight.

12 Hrs.

UNIT 4 FORWARD FLIGHT 12 Hrs. Momentum Theory. Variable Inflow Models. Blade Element Theory. Rotor Reference Planes. Hub Loads.

Power variation with forward speed. Rotor Blade flapping Motion: Simple Model.

UNIT 5 HELICOPTER TRIM AND STABILITY 12 Hrs. Equilibrium condition of helicopter. Trim analysis. Basics of helicopter stability.

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Gareth D. Padfield, “Helicopter Flight Dynamics”, Wiley India Pvt Ltd., 2011.

2. John M. Seddon and Simon Newman, “Basic Helicopter Aerodynamics”, Wiley-Blackwell, 2011.

3. Ray Prouty, “Helicopter Aerodynamics Volume I & II”, Phillips Business Information Inc., 2009.





SME5609 APPLIED AEROELASTICITY L T P Credits Total Marks

4 0 0 4 100

• To understand the theoretical concepts of material behaviour with particular emphasis on their elasticity property related to aerodynamic loading on aircraft structures.

UNIT 1 AEROELASTIC PHENOMENA 12Hrs. Stability versus response problems – The aero-elastic triangle of forces – Aero elasticity in Aircraft Design – Prevention of aero elastic instabilities. Influence and stiffness coefficient. Coupled oscillations.

UNIT 2 DIVERGENCE OF A LIFTING SURFACE 12Hrs.

Simple two dimensional idealisations-Strip theory – Integral equation of the second kind – Exact solutions for simple rectangular wings – ‘Semirigid’ assumption and approximate solutions – Generalised coordinates – Successive approximations – Numerical approximations using matrix equations.

UNIT 3 STEADY STATE AEROLASTIC PROBLEMS 12Hrs.

Loss and reversal of aileron control – Critical aileron reversal speed – Aileron efficiency – Semi rigid theory and successive approximations – Lift distribution – Rigid and elastic wings. Tail efficiency. Effect of elastic deformation on static longitudinal stability.

UNIT 4 FLUTTER PHENOMENON 12Hrs.

Non-dimensional parameters – Stiffness criteria – Dynamic mass balancing – Dimensional similarity. Flutter analysis – Two dimensional thin airfoils in steady incompressible flow – Quasisteady aerodynamic derivatives. Galerkin method for critical flutter speed – Stability of disturbed motion – Solution of the flutter determinant – Methods of determining the critical flutter speeds – Flutter prevention and control.

UNIT 5 EXAMPLES OF AEROELASTIC PROBLEMS 12Hrs. Galloping of transmission lines and Flow induced vibrations of transmission lines, tall slender structures and suspension bridges.

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT/REFERENC BOOKS

1. Fung Y.C., “An Introduction to the Theory of Aeroelasticity”, John Wiley & Sons Inc., New York, 2008.

2. Broadbent E.G., “Elementary Theory of Aeroelasticity”, Bun Hill Publications Ltd. 1986. 3. Bisplinghoff.R.L,.Ashley H, and Halfmann R.L. , “Aeroelasticity”, II Edition Addison Wesley Publishing Co., Inc., 1996.

4. Scanlan R.H and R.Rosenbaum, “Introduction to the study of Aircraft Vibration and Flutter”, Macmillan Co., New York, 1981. 5. Blevins R.D, “Flow Induced Vibrations”, Krieger Pub Co., 2001





SAE5610 DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF COMPOSITE L T P Credits Total.Marks

STRUCTURES 4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To understand the behaviour of aircraft structural component made up of composite materials at various loading and end

conditions.

x To know about the testing and repairing methodology of composite structural members.

UNIT 1 REVIEW OF COMPOSITE ANALYSIS 12 Hrs.

Lamina micromechanics, Lamina macromechanics, Classical lamination theory, Failure theories, Strength of laminates and

examples.

UNIT 2 VIBRATION AND STABILITY OF COMPOSITE PLATES 12 Hrs.

Governing equations for vibration and buckling of composite plates, Vibration of simply supported composite plates and

beams, buckling of simply supported composite plates under in-plane loads and approximate methods.

UNIT 3 STRUCTURAL DESIGN OF COMPOSITE STRUCTURES 12 Hrs.

Inputs for structural design, Steps in structural design, Selection of structural configuration and Structure sizing, Laminat e

design and carpet plots , Design principles with composites, Selection of orientation and thickness and Design examples, Stiffened

composite plates. Design of joints: Introduction, Types of joints, Mechanically fastened joints, Failure modes in mechanically fastened

joints, Design guidelines for mechanically fastened joints, Adhesively bonded joints, Failure modes in bonded joints, Stress

distribution in adhesive joints, Types of bonded joints, Selection of type of adhesive joints, Design guidelines for adhesive ly

bonded joints and Decision on the type of joint.

UNIT 4 DAMAGE TOLERANCE IN COMPOSITES 12 Hrs.

Introduction, Sources of damage, Types of damage, FAR requirements and advisory circulars, Building block approach,

Impact damages: Damage growth under fatigue loads, Residual strength: Tests and analytical methods. Detailed design: Basics o f

projections, Drawing standards and conventions, Introduction to CADD, Design of composite parts and Assembly design.

Optimization: Fundamentals of optimization, Mathematical concepts in optimization, Optimization of composite plates.

UNIT 5 TESTING OF COMPOSITE STRUCTURES 12 Hrs. Factors influencing testing, Test environment, Test methods and standards, Introduction to static testing of composite

structures and Examples. Repair of composite aircraft structures: Introduction to repair, Repair philosophy, Repair sequence,

Repair criteria, Damage assessment, Classification of repair, Selection of repair joints, Repair procedures, Certification of repair.

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Design and Analysis of Composite Structures: With Applications to Aerospace Structures, Christos Kasspoglou, Wiley, 2010.

2. Mechanics of Composite Materials, 2nd Edition, Autar K.Kaw, CRC Press,2005.

3. Polymer composites in aerospace industry, Phil E, Costas Soutis, Woodhead Publishing, 2014







SAE561 1 EXPERIMENTAL AND REPAIR TECHNIQUES L T P Credits

Total.Marks

FOR COMPOSITES 4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To understand the various Rapid Prototyping process involved in the CAD Process based on requirements.

To understand the design steps involved in evaluating the dimensions of a component to satisfy functional operation.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION 12 Hrs. Introduction to composite materials and their processing, Mechanical testing of composites. Adhesively Bonded Joints & Mechanically Fastened Joints. General Engineering Applications of FRP composites.

UNIT 2 REPAIR OF COMPOSITES 12 Hrs.

Repair philosophy, Repair sequence, repair criteria, sources of damages, Types of damages, Damage assessment. Classification of repair, Design of repair joints, Design of damage tolerant repair joints, Selection of repair joints, Repair procedures, Repair schemes for damaged composite aircraft parts. Why composites for repair of aged metallic structures, crack patching, repair qualification and certification procedures.

UNIT 3 FRACTURE MECHANICS OF COMPOSITES 12 Hrs.

Introduction to Fracture Mechanics, types of damages in composites and damage propagation. Fundamental Strain Gage Technology, Strain Gages on Composites, Normal-Stress and Shear Stress Gages and Rosettes, Strain Gage Reinforcement Effects on Low-Modulus Materials.

UNIT 4 EXPERIMENTAL CHARACTERIZATION OF COMPOSITES 12 Hrs.

Experimental characterization of composites, Mechanics of materials approach to stiffness Determination of E1, E2, v12 etc, Mechanical Test Fixtures. Instrumentation Practices for Tension & Shear Testing of Composite Materials, Creep and fatigue testing of Composites.

UNIT 5 NON DESTRUCTIVE TESTING OF COMPOSITES 12 Hrs. Ultrasonic, Acoustic Emission, X-ray, Infra red thermograph. Advances in composites testing- Digital image

correlation system, laser Doppler vibrometer Vibrothermography, laser ultrasonics, Embedded Fiber Optic Strain Sensors for damage detection.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Aircraft Maintenance & Repair, 7th Edition, Michael Kroes, William Watkins, Mc-Graw Hill Professional, 2013

2. Adhesively-Bonded Repair Techniques for Composites and Wood, Camphilo Raul, Scholar’s Press, 2014 3. Aeronautical Applications of Non-destructive Testing, Abbas Fahr, DEStech Publications, I DEStech Publications, 2015.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks: 80 Exam Duration: 3 Hrs.




L T P Credits

Total.Marks

SAE5612 THEORY OF PLATES AND SHELLS 4 0 0 4

100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To study the behaviour of the plates and shells with different geometry under various types of loads

UNIT 1 CLASSICAL PLATE THEORY 12 Hrs. Classical Plate Theory – Assumptions – Differential Equations – Boundary Conditions.

UNIT 2 PLATES OF VARIOUS SHAPES 12 Hrs. Navier’s Method of Solution for Simply Supported Rectangular Plates – Levy’s Method of Solution for Rectangular Plates under Different Boundary Conditions – Circular plates.

UNIT 3 EIGEN VALUE ANALYSIS Stability and Free Vibration Analysis of Rectangular Plates.

12 Hrs.

UNIT 4 APPROXIMATE METHODS 12 Hrs. Rayleigh – Ritz, Galerkin Methods– Finite Difference Method – Application to Rectangular Plates for Static,

Free Vibration and Stability Analysis.

UNIT 5 SHELLS 12 Hrs. Basic Concepts of Shell Type of Structures – Membrane and Bending Theories for Circular Cylindrical Shells.

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Timoshenko, S.P. Winowsky. S., and Kreger, Theory of Plates and Shells, McGraw Hill Book Co., 1990.

2. Varadan T.K & BhaskaR.K., “Análysis of plates – Theory and problems”, Narosha Publishing Co., 1999.

3. Flugge, W. Stresses in Shells, Springer – Verlag, 1985.

4. Timoshenko, S.P. and Gere, J.M., Theory of Elastic Stability, McGraw Hill Book Co. 1986.

5. Harry Kraus, ‘Thin Elastic Shells’, John Wiley and Sons, 1987.


Max. Marks: 100 Exam Duration: 3 Hrs. PART A: 6 Questions of 5 Marks each uniformly distributed among all units – No Choice 30 Marks

PART B: 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 14 Marks. 70 Marks

SME5613 HIGH TEMPERATURE PROBLEMS IN STRUCTURES L T P Credits Total Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To understand the behaviour of aircraft and spacecraft structural component due to temperature

variations at various altitude.

To understand the thermal stresses developed in plates,shells,thin cylinders, beams and truss members

UNIT 1 TEMPERATURE EQUATIONS & AERODYNAMIC HEATING 12 Hrs.

For Condition, radiation and convection – Fourier’s equation – Boundary and initial conditions – One-dimensional problem formulations – Methods and Solutions. Heat balance equation for idealised struc tures – Adiabatic temperature – Variations – Evaluation of transient temperature.

UNIT 2 THERMAL STRESS ANALYSIS 12 Hrs.

Thermal stresses and strains – Equations To study the behaviour of the plates and shells with different geometry under various types of loads of equilibrium – Boundary conditions – Thermo elasticity – Two dimensional problems and solutions – Airy stress function and applications.

UNIT 3 THERMAL STRESS IN BEAMS, TRUSSES AND THIN CYLINDERS 12 Hrs. Thermal stresses in axially loaded members, beams with varying cross sections. Effect of temperature in thin cylinders.

UNIT 4 THERMAL STRESSES IN PLATES 12 Hrs. Membrane thermal stresses – Circular plates – Rectangular plates – Bending thermal stresses – Thick plates with temperature varying along thickness – Thermal vibration of plates.

UNIT 5 SPECIAL TOPICS & MATERIALS 12 Hrs.

Thermal bucking, Fatigue and shock applications – High temperature effects on material properties.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Bruno A.B. and. Jerome H.W, “Theory of Thermal Stresses”, John Wiley & Sons Inc., New York, 1980.

2. Hoff N.J., “High Temperature effects in Aircraft Structures”, John Wiley & Sons Inc., London, 1986.

3. Johns D.J., “Thermal Stress Analysis”, Pergamon Press, Oxf ord, 1985.






SAE5614 VIBRATION OF STRUCTURES L T P Credits Total.Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To understand the free and forced vibration behaviour of beams,rings,arches,pales and membranes

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION

Transverse Vibrations of Strings-Axial and Tensional Vibrations of Bars-The Variational Formulation Modal Analysis, Properties of the Eigen value Problem

12 Hrs.

UNIT 2 FORCED VIBRATION ANALYSIS 12 Hrs. Forced Vibration Analysis Damping in Continuous, Systems Axially Translating Strings, d\'Alembert\'s Solution

Harmonic Waves and Energetics of Wave Motion. Scattering of Waves, Applications of the Wave Solution – I, Applications of the Wave Solution – II, Beam Models – I, Beam Models – II, Modal Analysis, Approximate Methods, Applications of Modal Solution, Flexural Waves in Beams

UNIT 3 BEAM VIBRATIONS 12 Hrs. Different types of Beam Models, Modal Analysis, Approximate Methods, Applications of Modal Solution, Flexural Waves in Beams and Vibrations of different types of beams. Dynamics of curved beams.

UNIT 4 VIBRATIONS OF RINGS, ARCHES AND MEMBRANES 12 Hrs. Vibrations of Rings and Arches, Dynamics of Membranes, the Rectangular Membrane, the Circular Membrane, Applications, Approximate Analysis of Membranes

UNIT 5 DYNAMICS OF PLATES 12 Hrs. Dynamics of Plates, Newtonian Formulation, Variational Formulation, the Rectangular Plate, the Circular Plate, Approximate Analysis of Plates.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Peter Hagedorn and Anirvan DasGupta: Vibrations and Waves in Continuous Mechanical Systems, Wiley, 2007

2. Leonard Meirovitch: Analytical Methods in Vibrations, The Macmillan Co., 1967

3. Rao S.S., Vibration of Continuous Systems, Wiley, 2007





SAE5615 ADVANCED PROPULSION SYSTEMS 4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE • To gain knowledge about the working principle and design procedure of various air breathing and non

Airbreathing advanced propulsion system.

UNIT 1 THERMODYNAMIC CYCLE ANALYSIS OF AIR-BREATHING PROPULSION SYSTEMS 12 Hrs. Air breathing propulsion systems like Turbojet, turboprop, ducted fan, Ramjet and Air augmented rockets –

Thermodynamic cycles – Pulse propulsion – Combustion process in pulse jet engines – inlet charging process – Supercritical charging and subcritical discharging – Subcritical charging and subcritical discharging – Subcritical charging and supercritical discharging.

UNIT 2 RAMJETS AND AIR AUGMENTED ROCKETS 12 Hrs. Preliminary performance calculations – Diffuser design and hypersonic inlets – combustor and nozzle design – air augmented rockets – engines with supersonic combustion.

UNIT 3 SCRAMJET PROPULSION SYSTEM 12 Hrs. Fundamental considerations of hypersonic air breathing vehicles – Preliminary concepts in engine airframe

integration – calculation of propulsion flow path – flow path integration– Various types of supersonic combustors – fundamental requirements of supersonic combustors – Mixing of fuel jets in supersonic cross flow – performance estimation of supersonic combustors.

UNIT 4 NUCLEAR PROPULSION 12 Hrs. Nuclear rocket engine design and performance – nuclear rocket reactors – nuclear rocket nozzles – nuclear

rocket engine control – radioisotope propulsion – basic thruster configurations – thruster technology – heat source development – nozzle development – nozzle performance of radiosotope propulsion systems.

UNIT 5 ELECTRIC AND ION PROPULSION 12 Hrs. Basic concepts in electric propulsion – power requirements and rocket efficiency – thermal thrusters –

electrostatic thrusters – plasma thruster of the art and future trends – Fundamentals of ion propulsion – performance analysis – electrical thrust devices – ion rocket engine.

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Sutton G.P., “Rocket Propulsion Elements”, John Wiley & Sons Inc., New York, 1998.

2. William H. Heiser and David T. Pratt, Hypersonic Airbreathing propulsion, AIAA Education Series, 2001.

3. Fortescue and Stark, Spacecraft Systems Engineering, 1999.

4. Cumpsty, Jet propulsion, Cambridge University Press, 2003.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks: 80 Exam Duration: 3 Hrs.




SAE5616 ELEMENTS OF ROCKET PROPULSION L T P Credits Total.Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To gain knowledge on how the propulsion system is working and introduction to nozzle theory.

To develop a thorough understanding of the solid propellant rocket and liquid propellant rocket.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO PROPULSION SYSTEM AND NOZZLE THEORY 12 Hrs.

Jet Propulsion and Rocket Propulsion – Definition, Principle, Classification, Description and Application; Electrical, Nuclear and other

Advanced Propulsion Systems. Ideal Rocket; Isentropic Flow through Nozzles; Exhaust Velocity; Choking; Nozzle Types; Nozzle Shape; Nozzle

Area Expansion Ratio; Under expansion and Overexpansion; Nozzle Configurations; Real Nozzles; Performance Correction Factors; Multiphase Flow.

UNIT 2 THRUST AND THRUST CHAMBERS 12 Hrs.

Thrust Equation; Specific Impulse, Thrust Coefficient, Characteristic Velocity and other Performance Parameters; Thrust Chambers; Methods of Cooling of Thrust Chambers; Steady State and Transient Heat Transfer; Heat Transfer Distribution; Steady State Heat Transfer to

Liquids in Cooling Jackets; Uncooled Thrust Chambers; Thermal insulation; Radiation; Exhaust Plumes.

UNIT 3 SOLID PROPELLANT ROCKET MOTORS 12 Hrs.

Application and Classification of Solid Propellant Rocket Motors; Propellants and Characteristics; Composite, Double Base and Composite

Modified Double Base Propellants; Metallized Propellants; Ingredients and Processing; Propellant Burning Rate; Erosive Burning; Propellant

Grains and Grain Configurations; Propellant Grains Stress and Strain.

UNIT 4 LIQUID PROPELLANT ROCKET ENGINES 12 Hrs.

Propellant and their Properties; Monopropellants and Bipropellants; Storable, Cryogenic and Gelled Propellants; Fuels and Oxidizers;

Metals; Propellant Tanks; Liquid Propellant Feed Systems; Injectors; Thrust Chamber Shapes and Characteristic Length; Hybrid Propellant Rocket Motors; Gaseous Propellant Rocket Motors and Reaction Control Systems.

UNIT 5 ROCKET TESTING 12 Hrs..

Types of Tests; Test Facilities and Safeguards; Safety and Environmental Concerns; Facilities and Safeguards; Monitoring and Control of Toxic Materials and Exhaust Gases; Instrumentation and Data Management; Reliability and Quality Control; Flight Testing.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Sutton, George P. and Biblarz, Oscar, “Rocket Propulsion Elements”, John Willey and Sons,5th edition,1986.

2. Barrere, M., “Rocket Propulsion”, Elsevier Publication, 1960

3. Turner, Martin J. L., “Rocket and Spacecraft Propulsion: Principle, Practice and New Developments”, Springer Verlag,2005.

4. Van de Kamp, “Elements of astromechanics”, Pitman Publishing Co., Ltd., London, 1980.

5. Parker E.R., “Materials for Missiles and Spacecraft”, McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc., 1982


Max. Marks: 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A: 6 Questions of 5 Marks each uniformly distributed among all units – No Choice 30 Marks



SAE5617 ROCKET COMBUSTION PROCESSES L T P Credits Total.Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To gain knowledge on how solid propellant combustion is taking place. To develop a thorough understanding of solid propellant system and liquid propellant system.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO SOLID PROPELLANT COMBUSTION 12 Hrs. Combustion of Double Base Propellants; Mechanism of Combustion –Temperature and Concentration Profile

across the Burning Surface; Combustion Mechanisms in Condensed Phase and Gas Phase; Theories of Combustion of D. B. Propellants – Boys & Corner Theory, Rice- Ginell and Crawford & Parr Theories; Mechanisms of Super Rate and Plateau Effects; Pyrolysis of Composite Propellant Ingredients and Two-temperature Postulate; Deflagration of Ammonium Perchlorate; Degradation of Fuel Binders; Combustion Mechanism of Composite Propellants; Theories of Combustion – Outline of Thermal Theory, GDF Model and Multiple Flame (BDP) Combustion Model.

UNIT 2 COMBUSTION OF METALS AND EROSIVE BURNING 12 Hrs. Physical Considerations; Description and Classification of Various Burning Metals; Experimental Nature of

Metal Powder Combustion; Theories of Combustion of Metal powders; Metal Combustion in deflagrating propellants; Effect of Aluminum on Propellant Burning Rate; Equilibrium Composition of Combustion Products of Metallized Propellants. Erosive Burning : Introduction; Threshold Velocity; Laboratory Methods for Determination of the Erosion Function; Theories of Erosive Burning– Levoneir and Robillard’s Theory; Vandenkerckhove Theory; Effect of Erosion on Geometry of Central Port; Effect of Cross- Flow Velocity, Free Stream Gas Composition, Propellant Characteristics and Combustion Chamber Pressure on Erosive Burning; Negative Erosion Phenomenon.

UNIT 3 LIQUID PROPELLANT COMBUSTION 12 Hrs.. Physico- Chemical Description of Combustion in a Liquid Propellant Rocket Motor; Atomization and Droplet

Size Distribution in Injection Sprays; Spherico- symmetric Model of Fuel Burning in Oxidizing Atmosphere; Correlation for Non- spherical Model; Effect of Drag on Combustion; Effect of Pressure on Combustion; Droplet Burning Rate Measurement; Combustion Models for Monopropellants.

UNIT 4 HYBRID PROPELLANT COMBUSTION 12 Hrs.. Introduction; Combustion Model for a Hybrid Fuel Burning in an Oxidizer Stream; Theories of Hybrid

combustion – Laminar Boundary Layer Theories, Turbulent Boundary Layer Theories, Theories Based on Chemical Kinetics; Effect of Pressure and Mass Flow Rate on Hybrid Combustion; Transient Behaviour of Hybrid Regression Rate; Temperature Profile Inside the Regressing Solid Fuel; Combustion of Metallized Hybrid Fuel; Effect of Radiation, Burning Time, Length and Port Size on Fuel Regression Rate.

UNIT 5 COMBUSTION INSTABILITY 12 Hrs.. Combustion Instability and Classification; Types of Instability in Solid Rocket and Liquid Rocket Motors ; Low

Frequency, Medium Frequency and High Frequency Instability in Liquid Rocket Motors – Causes, Analysis, Effects and Remedial Methods.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Kuo, K. K.& Summerefied, “Fundamentals of Solid Propellant Combustion”, Progress in Astronautics & Aeronautics, Vol. 90, AIAA.

2. Wolfhard, H. G., “Heterogeneous Combustion”, Progress in Astronautics & Aeronautics, Vol. 15, AIAA.1964

3. Altman, D. and Penner, S. S, “Liquid Propellant Rockets”, Princeton, 1971




SAE5618 NUMERICAL HEAT TRANSFER L T P Credits Total.Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To learn the basic concept behind finite element analysis related to heat transfer applications. To gain knowledge about heat transfer applications in aircraft and rocket systems using numerical methods.

UNIT 1 BASICS OF HEAT TRANSFER 12 Hrs. Basic review of heat transfer –Conduction Convection -Radiation– Aerospace problems- Application of numerical methods.

UNIT 2 CONDUCTIVE HEAT TRANSFER 12 Hrs.

Conduction – Convection systems – Numerical treatment of 1-D and 2-D heat conduction – Problems in Cartesian and polar coordinate systems – conduction with heat generation - Heat transfer problems in infinite and semi infinite solids – 1 -D Transient analysis

UNIT 3 CONVECTIVE HEAT TRANSFER 12 Hrs. Convection- Numerical treatment of steady 1-D and 2-d heat convection-diffusion steady-unsteady problems- Computation of thermal boundary layer flows-Transient free convection from a heat vertical plate.

UNIT 4 RADIATIVE HEAT TRANSFER 12 Hrs. Radiation- Numerical treatment of radiation problems- transient mixed convection and radiation from a vertical fin.

UNIT 5 SPECIAL PROBLEMS IN AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 12 Hrs. Heat transfer problem in gas turbine combustion chamber-ablative heat transfer- Aerodynamic

heating-Moving boundary problems - Numerical treatment-Developing a numerical code for 1D, 2D heat transfer problems.

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Ghoshdasidar P. S., “Computer simulation of low and Heat transfer” McGraw-Hill, Book Co, 1982.

2. Yunus A. Cengel, Heat Transfer – A Practical Approach Tata McGraw Hill, Edition,2003.

3. John H. Lienhard, “A Heat Transfer Text Book”, Prentice Hall Inc., 1981.

4. Holman J.P., “Heat Transfer”, McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc., New York, 6th Edition, 1991.


Max. Marks: 100 Exam Duration: 3 Hrs. PART A: 6 Questions of 5 Marks each uniformly distributed among all units – No Choice 30 Marks


SAE5619 ARMOURED FIGHTING VEHICLE AND L T P Credits Total.Marks

WEAPON SYSTEMS 4 0 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To understand about various fighting vehicle and weapon system To learn the design concepts of armaments and fighting vehicles which are suitable for Indian army.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION 12 Hrs. Introduction to AFVs and Vehicle Design: The threat. Development of tracked and wheeled AFVs including Main

Battle Tanks, Reconnaissance Vehicles, Infantry Fighting Vehicles and Self-Propelled guns. Fire power, mobility and protection. Basic design parameters of tracked and wheeled vehicles. Critical dimensions and design – NGP, MMP, Steerability ratio, Pitch ratio, Angle of approach, Angle of Departure, Track width, No. of road wheels, Buoyancy of Amphibious Light Tracked vehicles. Crew numbers and positions, power train location, fuel and ammunition stowage, armour requirements, weight and volume distribution. Strategic and battlefield mobility and transportability. Impact of strategic deployability requirements on weight reduction.

UNIT 2 ATTACK OF ARMOUR AND PROTECTION 12 Hrs.

An introduction to the mechanisms of armour penetration: KE, HEAT and HESH. Shaped charge principles, performance and target effects. Explosively formed fragments. Failure modes. Steel and aluminium armours, ceramic armour. Composite, explosive & electric armours. Armour distribution. Defensive Aids Suites. Structural Design: Structural requirements of armoured and non-armoured vehicles.

UNIT 3 VEHICLE DESIGN 12 Hrs.

Fundamentals of Ballistics, High velocity tank guns, cannon and artillery guns, secondary armament. Ammunition design and handling, autoloaders. Rifled and smooth bore guns. Barrel length accuracy velocity trade off. Future development in conventional guns and novel gun concepts. Gun launched missiles. Rocket Motors and Propellants. Light Weapon Design. Reliability and Systems Effectiveness.

UNIT 4 WEAPON SYSTEMS 12 Hrs.

Weapon system sights- vehicle applications - Individual weapon sights, fire control sights & systems - Day sights: direct optics, CCD cameras; Night sights: image intensifiers and thermal camerasCommander’s panoramic systems, hunter-killer concept Driver’s vision systems

UNIT 5 MAN-MACHINE INTERFACE 12 Hrs. The man-machine interface - Ergonomic, simple – soldier friendly, clear (not confusing); Human systems

integration (HSI) - combining humans and machines in a way that maximizes human and total system performance

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Tank Technology (Vol I & II) by RM Gronkiewicz – Jane’s information Group, 1991.

2. Fighting vehicle, TW Terry, Brassey’s, 1991

3. The Greenhill Armoured Fighting Vehicles Data Book - Ian Hogg – Greenhill books - ISBN: 1853673919, 978-1853673917


Max. Marks: 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A: 6 Questions of 5 Marks each uniformly distributed among all units – No Choice 30 Marks


SME5620 B AL L I ST IC S OF BOMBS AND P R O J E C T I L E S L T P Credits Total Marks

4 0 0 4 100

COURSE O B J E C T I V E S

To understand the usage procedures of Internal Ballistics, External Ballistics and external Ballistics of Rockets.

To know the theory behind Ballistics.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION 12 Hrs. Basics of Ballistics of any projectile, Difference between precision, accuracy and CEP.

.

UNIT 2 INTERNAL BALL I ST ICS (GUNS) 12 Hrs.

Burning of propellants, Vielle’s mode and rate of burnings, form function, Resalls’ Energy Equation. Internal ballistic solutions, Hunt hind Heydenreigh system. Lodue Method. Effect of vibrations in loading conditions, Similarity relations.

UNIT 3 EXTERNAL BALL ISTIC S (GUNS) 12 Hrs.

Aerodynamic force system. Normal equations. Siacci form of solutions, Numerical methods o f trajectory computation, Meteorological corrections. Angular motion of the Centre of mass. Drift and deflection, Dispersion of fire.

UNIT 4 EXTERNAL BALL ISTIC S OF R O C K E T S 12 Hrs. Launch dynamics, plane trajectory, boost plane trajectory models, rocket acc uracy (dispersion and stability), rocket-assisted projectiles.

UNIT 5 BOMB BALLISTICS 12 Hrs.

Aerodynamic forces and moments acting on a bomb, Drag co-efficient, Terminal velocity and Ballistic index, Trajectory of bombs, Simulated stores (similitude) and their trajectories, Bomb stability derivatives and analysis (in roll, pitch and yaw), wind tunnel testing, Bomb trajectory calculations with point mass and Six Degrees of Freedom Equations. Calculation of Moment of Inertia and Centre of Gravity of bombs..

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT / R E F E R E N C E BOOKS

1. Text Book of Ballistic & Gunnery, Vol I & II, HMSO Publication, 1987.

2. Ballistics Theory and Design of Guns & Ammunition, , DE Carlucci & SS Jacobson, CRC Press, 2007.

3. Military Ballistics: A Basic Manual (Brassey’s New Battlefield Weapons Systems and Technology Series into 21st Century), CL Farrar, DW Leeming, GM Moss, Brassey's (UK) Ltd,1999.

4. Modern Exterior Ballistics, Robert L McCoy, Schiffer Publishing, 2001

END S E M E S T E R EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN



faculty of mechanical engineering ... - … faculty of mechanical engineering ... b.tech...

Documents